WO2022189882A1 - 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 - Google Patents
表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022189882A1 WO2022189882A1 PCT/IB2022/051717 IB2022051717W WO2022189882A1 WO 2022189882 A1 WO2022189882 A1 WO 2022189882A1 IB 2022051717 W IB2022051717 W IB 2022051717W WO 2022189882 A1 WO2022189882 A1 WO 2022189882A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- light
- conductive
- emitting
- insulating
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 title claims description 95
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 207
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 claims description 87
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 claims description 87
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 claims description 66
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 claims description 66
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 49
- 230000005525 hole transport Effects 0.000 claims description 21
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 claims description 21
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 21
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 16
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 abstract description 3
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 2517
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 391
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 181
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 179
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 162
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 130
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 57
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 51
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 50
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 46
- 239000011241 protective layer Substances 0.000 description 38
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 35
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 35
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 34
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 34
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 33
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 33
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 28
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 28
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 28
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 28
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 28
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 27
- 238000000231 atomic layer deposition Methods 0.000 description 25
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 25
- -1 polyglycerin Polymers 0.000 description 25
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 24
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 24
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 23
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 22
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 22
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 22
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 22
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 21
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 21
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 21
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 21
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 21
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 20
- GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Gallium Chemical compound [Ga] GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 19
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 19
- APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium atom Chemical compound [In] APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 18
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 18
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 17
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 17
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 17
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 17
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 16
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 16
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 16
- 238000007740 vapor deposition Methods 0.000 description 16
- 238000001312 dry etching Methods 0.000 description 15
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 15
- XMWRBQBLMFGWIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N C60 fullerene Chemical class C12=C3C(C4=C56)=C7C8=C5C5=C9C%10=C6C6=C4C1=C1C4=C6C6=C%10C%10=C9C9=C%11C5=C8C5=C8C7=C3C3=C7C2=C1C1=C2C4=C6C4=C%10C6=C9C9=C%11C5=C5C8=C3C3=C7C1=C1C2=C4C6=C2C9=C5C3=C12 XMWRBQBLMFGWIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 14
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 14
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 14
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 13
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 13
- 238000001039 wet etching Methods 0.000 description 13
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 12
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 11
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 11
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 11
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 11
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 11
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 229920006122 polyamide resin Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 11
- VWQVUPCCIRVNHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N yttrium atom Chemical compound [Y] VWQVUPCCIRVNHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 238000002441 X-ray diffraction Methods 0.000 description 10
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 10
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000010894 electron beam technology Methods 0.000 description 10
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 10
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 9
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 9
- 239000009719 polyimide resin Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 8
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 150000001342 alkaline earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229910003472 fullerene Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- MRELNEQAGSRDBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N lanthanum(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[La+3].[La+3] MRELNEQAGSRDBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- PLDDOISOJJCEMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Nd+3].[Nd+3] PLDDOISOJJCEMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 229920002037 poly(vinyl butyral) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 8
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 8
- QCWXUUIWCKQGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zirconium Chemical compound [Zr] QCWXUUIWCKQGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- PMHQVHHXPFUNSP-UHFFFAOYSA-M copper(1+);methylsulfanylmethane;bromide Chemical compound Br[Cu].CSC PMHQVHHXPFUNSP-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 7
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 7
- 150000002484 inorganic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- 238000004768 lowest unoccupied molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000005011 phenolic resin Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229910052726 zirconium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isopropanol Chemical compound CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphoric acid Chemical compound OP(O)(O)=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000005669 field effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229910000449 hafnium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- WIHZLLGSGQNAGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium(4+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[Hf+4] WIHZLLGSGQNAGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- LNEPOXFFQSENCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N haloperidol Chemical compound C1CC(O)(C=2C=CC(Cl)=CC=2)CCN1CCCC(=O)C1=CC=C(F)C=C1 LNEPOXFFQSENCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000004770 highest occupied molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 6
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229910052756 noble gas Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical group [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzocyclobutene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCC2=C1 UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 5
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 5
- AJNVQOSZGJRYEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N digallium;oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ga+3].[Ga+3] AJNVQOSZGJRYEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N disiloxane Chemical class [SiH3]O[SiH3] KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 5
- 235000019441 ethanol Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 229910001195 gallium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 229910052735 hafnium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- VBJZVLUMGGDVMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium atom Chemical compound [Hf] VBJZVLUMGGDVMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052746 lanthanum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- FZLIPJUXYLNCLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N lanthanum atom Chemical compound [La] FZLIPJUXYLNCLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000002346 layers by function Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000004528 spin coating Methods 0.000 description 5
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920002284 Cellulose triacetate Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229910052684 Cerium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229920000089 Cyclic olefin copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- MYMOFIZGZYHOMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dioxygen Chemical compound O=O MYMOFIZGZYHOMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910001111 Fine metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004373 Pullulan Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920001218 Pullulan Polymers 0.000 description 4
- NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N [(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5-diacetyloxy-3-[(2s,3r,4s,5r,6r)-3,4,5-triacetyloxy-6-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-6-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5,6-triacetyloxy-2-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-3-yl]oxyoxan-2-yl]methyl acetate Chemical compound O([C@@H]1O[C@@H]([C@H]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O)O[C@H]1[C@@H]([C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O1)OC(C)=O)COC(=O)C)[C@@H]1[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O[C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 4
- WZJYKHNJTSNBHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[h]quinoline Chemical class C1=CN=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 WZJYKHNJTSNBHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- DQXBYHZEEUGOBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N but-3-enoic acid;ethene Chemical compound C=C.OC(=O)CC=C DQXBYHZEEUGOBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XJHCXCQVJFPJIK-UHFFFAOYSA-M caesium fluoride Chemical compound [F-].[Cs+] XJHCXCQVJFPJIK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- ZMIGMASIKSOYAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N cerium Chemical group [Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce][Ce] ZMIGMASIKSOYAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper(II) phthalocyanine Chemical compound [Cu+2].C12=CC=CC=C2C(N=C2[N-]C(C3=CC=CC=C32)=N2)=NC1=NC([C]1C=CC=CC1=1)=NC=1N=C1[C]3C=CC=CC3=C2[N-]1 XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910001882 dioxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000005038 ethylene vinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical group [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 4
- 150000003949 imides Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000002159 nanocrystal Substances 0.000 description 4
- SIWVEOZUMHYXCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoyttriooxy)yttrium Chemical compound O=[Y]O[Y]=O SIWVEOZUMHYXCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);tantalum(5+) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ta+5].[Ta+5] BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- RVTZCBVAJQQJTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);zirconium(4+) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[Zr+4] RVTZCBVAJQQJTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalocyanine Chemical compound N1C(N=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C(N=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C(=N4)N3)=N2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1N=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C4=N1 IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229920001200 poly(ethylene-vinyl acetate) Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 4
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 235000019423 pullulan Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 238000001004 secondary ion mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229920002050 silicone resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229910001936 tantalum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- WGTYBPLFGIVFAS-UHFFFAOYSA-M tetramethylammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].C[N+](C)(C)C WGTYBPLFGIVFAS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 4
- YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[Zn++].[In+3] YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910001928 zirconium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- XESMNQMWRSEIET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,9-dinaphthalen-2-yl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC(C=2C=C3C=CC=CC3=CC=2)=NC2=C1C=CC1=C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=C(C=3C=C4C=CC=CC4=CC=3)N=C21 XESMNQMWRSEIET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=NC2=C1C=CC1=C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=CN=C21 DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanol Chemical compound OC OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910000861 Mg alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- MUBZPKHOEPUJKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oxalic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(O)=O MUBZPKHOEPUJKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium nitride Chemical compound [Ti]#N NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052769 Ytterbium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910000147 aluminium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000001454 anthracenes Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000004982 aromatic amines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229910052790 beryllium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N beryllium atom Chemical group [Be] ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000001716 carbazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000007766 curtain coating Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000002003 electron diffraction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000002149 energy-dispersive X-ray emission spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- YBMRDBCBODYGJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium oxide Inorganic materials O=[Ge]=O YBMRDBCBODYGJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000005247 gettering Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910021389 graphene Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000001341 grazing-angle X-ray diffraction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 3
- PQXKHYXIUOZZFA-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium fluoride Chemical compound [Li+].[F-] PQXKHYXIUOZZFA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 239000000395 magnesium oxide Substances 0.000 description 3
- CPLXHLVBOLITMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium oxide Inorganic materials [Mg]=O CPLXHLVBOLITMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- AXZKOIWUVFPNLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium;oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[Mg+2] AXZKOIWUVFPNLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910021421 monocrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000002790 naphthalenes Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000007645 offset printing Methods 0.000 description 3
- PVADDRMAFCOOPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxogermanium Chemical compound [Ge]=O PVADDRMAFCOOPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000035699 permeability Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229920001568 phenolic resin Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 238000000623 plasma-assisted chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004549 pulsed laser deposition Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000003222 pyridines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229940083082 pyrimidine derivative acting on arteriolar smooth muscle Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 150000003230 pyrimidines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000003252 quinoxalines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005507 spraying Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000010345 tape casting Methods 0.000 description 3
- JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellanylidenegermanium Chemical compound [Te]=[Ge] JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052720 vanadium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- GPPXJZIENCGNKB-UHFFFAOYSA-N vanadium Chemical group [V]#[V] GPPXJZIENCGNKB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NAWDYIZEMPQZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N ytterbium Chemical compound [Yb] NAWDYIZEMPQZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910001316 Ag alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- ROFVEXUMMXZLPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bipyridyl Chemical class N1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=N1 ROFVEXUMMXZLPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorane Chemical compound F KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001609 Poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004962 Polyamide-imide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001328 Polyvinylidene chloride Polymers 0.000 description 2
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical group C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NRCMAYZCPIVABH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinacridone Chemical compound N1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=C1C(=O)C3=CC=CC=C3NC1=C2 NRCMAYZCPIVABH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinoline Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiazole Chemical group C1=CSC=N1 FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000122 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229940027991 antiseptic and disinfectant quinoline derivative Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000004760 aramid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920003235 aromatic polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000004380 ashing Methods 0.000 description 2
- QHIWVLPBUQWDMQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N butyl prop-2-enoate;methyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate;prop-2-enoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C=C.COC(=O)C(C)=C.CCCCOC(=O)C=C QHIWVLPBUQWDMQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052792 caesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- TVFDJXOCXUVLDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N caesium atom Chemical compound [Cs] TVFDJXOCXUVLDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002484 cyclic voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000001925 cycloalkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000004826 dibenzofurans Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- IYYZUPMFVPLQIF-ALWQSETLSA-N dibenzothiophene Chemical class C1=CC=CC=2[34S]C3=C(C=21)C=CC=C3 IYYZUPMFVPLQIF-ALWQSETLSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000003618 dip coating Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007598 dipping method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005281 excited state Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000001508 eye Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 150000002220 fluorenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002240 furans Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000012447 hatching Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000002390 heteroarenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002460 imidazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000007654 immersion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940079865 intestinal antiinfectives imidazole derivative Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical class [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002605 large molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- SJCKRGFTWFGHGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium silver Chemical compound [Mg].[Ag] SJCKRGFTWFGHGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000005389 magnetism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011572 manganese Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000004702 methyl esters Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002121 nanofiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002835 noble gases Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000002524 organometallic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000004866 oxadiazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000007978 oxazole derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002971 oxazolyl group Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000005041 phenanthrolines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000005240 physical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920006350 polyacrylonitrile resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002312 polyamide-imide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001225 polyester resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004645 polyester resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011112 polyethylene naphthalate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920005591 polysilicon Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920005990 polystyrene resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920005749 polyurethane resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000005033 polyvinylidene chloride Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000003373 pyrazinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000003220 pyrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000000714 pyrimidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000003248 quinolines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002943 quinolinyl group Chemical class N1=C(C=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 description 2
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052761 rare earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000002910 rare earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000005871 repellent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000010980 sapphire Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052594 sapphire Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012916 structural analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940042055 systemic antimycotics triazole derivative Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000002230 thermal chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001187 thermosetting polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 150000007979 thiazole derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000003577 thiophenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000005580 triphenylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- JYEUMXHLPRZUAT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2,3-triazine Chemical group C1=CN=NN=C1 JYEUMXHLPRZUAT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FCEHBMOGCRZNNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-benzothiophene Chemical class C1=CC=C2SC=CC2=C1 FCEHBMOGCRZNNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QWENRTYMTSOGBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-1,2,3-Triazole Chemical group C=1C=NNN=1 QWENRTYMTSOGBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KXGFMDJXCMQABM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methoxy-6-methylphenol Chemical compound [CH]OC1=CC=CC([CH])=C1O KXGFMDJXCMQABM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AEJARLYXNFRVLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4H-1,2,3-triazole Chemical group C1C=NN=N1 AEJARLYXNFRVLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JWBHNEZMQMERHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5,6,11,12,17,18-hexaazatrinaphthylene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N=C3C4=NC5=CC=CC=C5N=C4C4=NC5=CC=CC=C5N=C4C3=NC2=C1 JWBHNEZMQMERHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000838 Al alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910018137 Al-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910018573 Al—Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000881 Cu alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052693 Europium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910018068 Li 2 O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910012294 LiPP Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PWHULOQIROXLJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Manganese Chemical compound [Mn] PWHULOQIROXLJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitric acid Chemical compound O[N+]([O-])=O GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001252 Pd alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920012266 Poly(ether sulfone) PES Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004695 Polyether sulfone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000265 Polyparaphenylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004721 Polyphenylene oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910008355 Si-Sn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910006453 Si—Sn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910020994 Sn-Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910009069 Sn—Zn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000005811 Viola adunca Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 240000009038 Viola odorata Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000013487 Viola odorata Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000002254 Viola papilionacea Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 244000172533 Viola sororia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000004847 absorption spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001339 alkali metal compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001341 alkaline earth metal compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940054051 antipsychotic indole derivative Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052785 arsenic Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N arsenic atom Chemical compound [As] RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000001367 artery Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- GPBUGPUPKAGMDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N azanylidynemolybdenum Chemical compound [Mo]#N GPBUGPUPKAGMDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005605 benzo group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000988 bone and bone Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000005252 bulbus oculi Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- YVVVSJAMVJMZRF-UHFFFAOYSA-N c1cncc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1nc(nc(n1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccnc1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccnc1 Chemical compound c1cncc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1nc(nc(n1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccnc1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccc(c1)-c1cccnc1 YVVVSJAMVJMZRF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FJDQFPXHSGXQBY-UHFFFAOYSA-L caesium carbonate Chemical compound [Cs+].[Cs+].[O-]C([O-])=O FJDQFPXHSGXQBY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910000024 caesium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium difluoride Chemical compound [F-].[F-].[Ca+2] WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910001634 calcium fluoride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052800 carbon group element Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000420 cerium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007795 chemical reaction product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000004696 coordination complex Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- LSXDOTMGLUJQCM-UHFFFAOYSA-M copper(i) iodide Chemical compound I[Cu] LSXDOTMGLUJQCM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 230000007797 corrosion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005260 corrosion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001893 coumarin derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001907 coumarones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910021419 crystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000005331 diazinyl group Chemical group N1=NC(=CC=C1)* 0.000 description 1
- 229910001873 dinitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ALKZAGKDWUSJED-UHFFFAOYSA-N dinuclear copper ion Chemical compound [Cu].[Cu] ALKZAGKDWUSJED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005401 electroluminescence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005674 electromagnetic induction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002524 electron diffraction data Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000006575 electron-withdrawing group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- OGPBJKLSAFTDLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N europium atom Chemical compound [Eu] OGPBJKLSAFTDLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007687 exposure technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000744 eyelid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007306 functionalization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009477 glass transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000011187 glycerol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000002173 high-resolution transmission electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002883 imidazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- BDVZHDCXCXJPSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(3+) oxygen(2-) titanium(4+) Chemical compound [O-2].[Ti+4].[In+3] BDVZHDCXCXJPSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002475 indoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- VVVPGLRKXQSQSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolo[3,2-c]carbazole Chemical class C1=CC=CC2=NC3=C4C5=CC=CC=C5N=C4C=CC3=C21 VVVPGLRKXQSQSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002361 inverse photoelectron spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007733 ion plating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010884 ion-beam technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010030 laminating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007644 letterpress printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- FUJCRWPEOMXPAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N lithium oxide Chemical compound [Li+].[Li+].[O-2] FUJCRWPEOMXPAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001947 lithium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052748 manganese Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011259 mixed solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004776 molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910000476 molybdenum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- LKKPNUDVOYAOBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N naphthalocyanine Chemical class N1C(N=C2C3=CC4=CC=CC=C4C=C3C(N=C3C4=CC5=CC=CC=C5C=C4C(=N4)N3)=N2)=C(C=C2C(C=CC=C2)=C2)C2=C1N=C1C2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C2C4=N1 LKKPNUDVOYAOBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910017604 nitric acid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000001151 other effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000006408 oxalic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- BMMGVYCKOGBVEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoceriooxy)cerium Chemical compound [Ce]=O.O=[Ce]=O BMMGVYCKOGBVEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxomolybdenum Chemical compound [Mo]=O PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 1
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002987 phenanthrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000005359 phenylpyridines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001420 photoelectron spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003057 platinum Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920003227 poly(N-vinyl carbazole) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000553 poly(phenylenevinylene) Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920000172 poly(styrenesulfonic acid) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000570 polyether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006393 polyether sulfone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002098 polyfluorene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000123 polythiophene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000004033 porphyrin derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PBMFSQRYOILNGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridazine Chemical group C1=CC=NN=C1 PBMFSQRYOILNGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003233 pyrroles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000004059 quinone derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical class [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005488 sandblasting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006748 scratching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002393 scratching effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910000679 solder Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010186 staining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052712 strontium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- CIOAGBVUUVVLOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N strontium atom Chemical compound [Sr] CIOAGBVUUVVLOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003457 sulfones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000010897 surface acoustic wave method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003685 thermal hair damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N titanium oxide Inorganic materials [Ti]=O OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003918 triazines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 210000003462 vein Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000011800 void material Substances 0.000 description 1
- TYHJXGDMRRJCRY-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) tin(4+) Chemical compound [O-2].[Zn+2].[Sn+4].[In+3] TYHJXGDMRRJCRY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OPCPDIFRZGJVCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) titanium(4+) Chemical compound [O-2].[Zn+2].[In+3].[Ti+4] OPCPDIFRZGJVCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BNEMLSQAJOPTGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc;dioxido(oxo)tin Chemical compound [Zn+2].[O-][Sn]([O-])=O BNEMLSQAJOPTGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/10—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
- H10K50/11—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED] characterised by the electroluminescent [EL] layers
- H10K50/125—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED] characterised by the electroluminescent [EL] layers specially adapted for multicolour light emission, e.g. for emitting white light
- H10K50/13—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED] characterised by the electroluminescent [EL] layers specially adapted for multicolour light emission, e.g. for emitting white light comprising stacked EL layers within one EL unit
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/121—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays characterised by the geometry or disposition of pixel elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09F—DISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
- G09F9/00—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
- G09F9/30—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/10—Apparatus or processes specially adapted to the manufacture of electroluminescent light sources
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/12—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/12—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
- H05B33/14—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces characterised by the chemical or physical composition or the arrangement of the electroluminescent material, or by the simultaneous addition of the electroluminescent material in or onto the light source
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/12—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
- H05B33/22—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces characterised by the chemical or physical composition or the arrangement of auxiliary dielectric or reflective layers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/12—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
- H05B33/26—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces characterised by the composition or arrangement of the conductive material used as an electrode
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/10—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
- H10K50/14—Carrier transporting layers
- H10K50/15—Hole transporting layers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/10—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
- H10K50/14—Carrier transporting layers
- H10K50/16—Electron transporting layers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/10—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
- H10K50/17—Carrier injection layers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/10—OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
- H10K50/19—Tandem OLEDs
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/1201—Manufacture or treatment
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/122—Pixel-defining structures or layers, e.g. banks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
- H10K59/353—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels characterised by the geometrical arrangement of the RGB subpixels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8051—Anodes
- H10K59/80515—Anodes characterised by their shape
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8051—Anodes
- H10K59/80517—Multilayers, e.g. transparent multilayers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8052—Cathodes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/90—Assemblies of multiple devices comprising at least one organic light-emitting element
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K71/00—Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
- H10K71/10—Deposition of organic active material
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K71/00—Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
- H10K71/20—Changing the shape of the active layer in the devices, e.g. patterning
- H10K71/231—Changing the shape of the active layer in the devices, e.g. patterning by etching of existing layers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K71/00—Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
- H10K71/60—Forming conductive regions or layers, e.g. electrodes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/123—Connection of the pixel electrodes to the thin film transistors [TFT]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
- H10K59/351—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels comprising more than three subpixels, e.g. red-green-blue-white [RGBW]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
- H10K59/352—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels the areas of the RGB subpixels being different
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/38—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising colour filters or colour changing media [CCM]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/60—OLEDs integrated with inorganic light-sensitive elements, e.g. with inorganic solar cells or inorganic photodiodes
- H10K59/65—OLEDs integrated with inorganic image sensors
Definitions
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a display device, a display module, and an electronic device.
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a display device.
- one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field.
- Technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, storage devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices (e.g., touch sensors), input/output devices (e.g., touch panels), The method of driving them or the method of manufacturing them can be mentioned as an example.
- display devices are expected to be applied to various uses.
- applications of large display devices include home television devices (also referred to as televisions or television receivers), digital signage (digital signage), and PID (Public Information Display).
- home television devices also referred to as televisions or television receivers
- digital signage digital signage
- PID Public Information Display
- mobile information terminals such as smart phones and tablet terminals with touch panels are being developed.
- Devices that require high-definition display devices include, for example, virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), alternative reality (SR), and mixed reality (MR) ) are being actively developed.
- VR virtual reality
- AR augmented reality
- SR alternative reality
- MR mixed reality
- a light-emitting device having a light-emitting device As a display device, for example, a light-emitting device having a light-emitting device (also referred to as a light-emitting element) has been developed.
- a light-emitting device also referred to as an EL device or EL element
- EL the phenomenon of electroluminescence
- EL is a DC constant-voltage power supply that can easily be made thin and light, can respond quickly to an input signal, and It is applied to a display device.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a display device for VR using an organic EL device (also referred to as an organic EL element).
- an island-shaped light-emitting layer can be formed by a vacuum evaporation method using a metal mask (also referred to as a shadow mask).
- a metal mask also referred to as a shadow mask.
- island-like structures are formed due to various influences such as precision of the metal mask, misalignment between the metal mask and the substrate, bending of the metal mask, and broadening of the contour of the deposited film due to vapor scattering.
- the shape and position of the light-emitting layer in (1) deviate from the design, it is difficult to increase the definition and aperture ratio of the display device.
- the layer profile may be blurred and the edge thickness may be reduced. In other words, the thickness of the island-shaped light-emitting layer may vary depending on the location.
- the manufacturing yield will be low due to low dimensional accuracy of the metal mask and deformation due to heat or the like.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a high-definition display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a high-resolution display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a large-sized display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a small display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a high-definition display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a high-resolution display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a large-sized display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a small display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable method for manufacturing a display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a display device with high yield.
- One aspect of the invention comprises a first light emitting device and a second light emitting device, the first light emitting device comprising a first conductive layer, a second conductive layer over the first conductive layer, A second light emitting device having a first light emitting layer on the second conductive layer and a common electrode on the first light emitting layer, the second light emitting device comprising: a third conductive layer; A fourth conductive layer, a second light-emitting layer on the fourth conductive layer, and a common electrode on the second light-emitting layer, the second conductive layer laterally of the first conductive layer.
- a fourth conductive layer covering the sides of the third conductive layer; edges of the first light-emitting layer aligned or substantially aligned with edges of the second conductive layer; The edges of the two light-emitting layers are aligned or nearly aligned with the edges of the fourth conductive layer, the display device.
- the display device described above preferably has a first insulating layer.
- a first insulating layer covers each side of the first light-emitting layer, the second light-emitting layer, the second conductive layer, and the fourth conductive layer, and the common electrode is on the first insulating layer. preferably located.
- the display device described above preferably has a second insulating layer.
- the first insulating layer has an inorganic material
- the second insulating layer has an organic material
- the first insulating layer is interposed between the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer. preferably overlaps the side of the
- the display device described above preferably has a first layer.
- the first layer is located on the first light-emitting layer, and one end of the first layer is aligned with the end of the first light-emitting layer and the end of the second conductive layer in a cross-sectional view. or substantially aligned, the other end of the first layer is located on the first light-emitting layer, and the first insulating layer preferably covers the top surface of the first layer.
- the first layer preferably has a laminated structure of an inorganic insulating layer and a conductive layer on the inorganic insulating layer.
- the first light emitting device has a common layer between the first light emitting layer and the common electrode
- the second light emitting device has a common layer between the second light emitting layer and the common electrode.
- the common layer preferably has at least one of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer.
- One aspect of the invention comprises a first light emitting device and a second light emitting device, the first light emitting device comprising a first conductive layer, a second conductive layer over the first conductive layer, A second light emitting device having a first EL layer on the second conductive layer and a common electrode on the first EL layer, the second light emitting device comprising: a third conductive layer; a fourth conductive layer; a second EL layer over the fourth conductive layer; and a common electrode over the second EL layer, the first EL layer overlying the second conductive layer.
- a first light-emitting unit, a first charge generation layer on the first light-emitting unit, a second light-emitting unit on the first charge generation layer, and the second EL layer comprises a fourth a third light emitting unit on the conductive layer of; a second charge generating layer on the third light emitting unit; a fourth light emitting unit on the second charge generating layer;
- the layers cover the sides of the first conductive layer, the fourth conductive layer covers the sides of the third conductive layer, and the edges of the first EL layer align with the edges of the second conductive layer. or substantially aligned, and the edge of the second EL layer is aligned or substantially aligned with the edge of the fourth conductive layer.
- the display device described above preferably has a first insulating layer.
- a first insulating layer covers each side of the first EL layer, the second EL layer, the second conductive layer, and the fourth conductive layer, and the common electrode is on the first insulating layer. preferably located.
- the display device described above preferably has a second insulating layer.
- the first insulating layer contains an inorganic material and the second insulating layer contains an organic material. preferably overlaps the side of the
- the display device described above preferably has a first layer.
- the first layer is located over the first EL layer, and one end of the first layer is aligned with the end of the first EL layer and the end of the second conductive layer in a cross-sectional view. preferably aligned or substantially aligned, the other end of the first layer being located on the first EL layer, and the first insulating layer covering the top surface of the first layer.
- the first layer preferably has a laminated structure of an inorganic insulating layer and a conductive layer on the inorganic insulating layer.
- the first light emitting device has a common layer between the first EL layer and the common electrode
- the second light emitting device has a common layer between the second EL layer and the common electrode.
- the common layer preferably has at least one of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer.
- One aspect of the present invention is a display module having a display device having any of the above configurations, and a connector such as a flexible printed circuit (hereinafter referred to as FPC) or TCP (tape carrier package) attached.
- FPC flexible printed circuit
- TCP tape carrier package
- a display module such as a display module in which an integrated circuit (IC) is mounted by a COG (Chip On Glass) method, a COF (Chip On Film) method, or the like.
- One embodiment of the present invention is an electronic device including the display module described above and at least one of a housing, a battery, a camera, a speaker, and a microphone.
- a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer are formed in islands over an insulating surface, and the first conductive layer is formed over the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer.
- forming a film forming a first layer on the first conductive film, forming a first sacrificial layer on the first layer, forming an end portion of the first layer and the first sacrificial layer;
- the end of the first conductive layer is located outside the end of the first conductive layer, and the first conductive film is exposed so that at least part of the region overlapping the second conductive layer is exposed.
- a second layer is formed over the first sacrificial layer and the first conductive film, a second sacrificial layer is formed over the second layer, and a second sacrificial layer is formed over the second layer;
- the second conductive layer is positioned outside the end of the second conductive layer and at least a portion of the first sacrificial layer is exposed.
- the method for manufacturing a display device at least part of the first sacrificial layer and the second sacrificial layer is removed so as to form a common electrode on the first layer and the second layer.
- the third conductive layer and the fourth conductive layer After forming the third conductive layer and the fourth conductive layer, and before forming the common electrode, at least a side surface of the third conductive layer, a side surface of the fourth conductive layer, a side surface of the first layer, and a side surface of the second layer. layer, the side surface and the top surface of the first sacrificial layer, and the side surfaces and the top surface of the second sacrificial layer; It is preferable to form a first insulating layer with one end located on the first layer and the other end located on the second layer in view.
- a first insulating film is formed using an inorganic material, and after the first insulating film is formed, a second insulating film is formed over the first insulating film using an organic material, and a second insulating film is formed. forming a second insulating layer, one end of which is located on the first layer and the other end of which is located on the second layer in a cross-sectional view, by processing the insulating film of preferably.
- a photosensitive resin is preferably used as the organic material.
- one end is aligned with or substantially aligned with the end of the first layer, and the other end is on the first layer It is preferable to process the first sacrificial layer so as to be located at .
- forming at least one of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer as a common layer on the first layer and the second layer before forming the common electrode; is preferred.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a high-definition display device.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a high-resolution display device.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a large-sized display device.
- a small display device can be provided.
- One embodiment of the present invention can provide a highly reliable display device.
- a method for manufacturing a high-definition display device can be provided.
- a method for manufacturing a high-resolution display device can be provided.
- a method for manufacturing a large display device can be provided.
- a method for manufacturing a small display device can be provided.
- a highly reliable method for manufacturing a display device can be provided.
- a method for manufacturing a display device with high yield can be provided.
- FIG. 1A is a top view showing an example of a display device.
- 1B and 1C are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- 2A to 2F are top views showing examples of pixels.
- 3A to 3F are top views showing examples of pixels.
- 4A to 4H are top views showing examples of pixels.
- 5A to 5D are top views showing examples of pixels.
- 6A to 6D are top views showing examples of pixels.
- 6E to 6G are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- 7A to 7F are top views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 8A to 8C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 9A to 9C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 10A to 10C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 11A to 11C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 12A to 12C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 13A to 13C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 14A to 14C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 15A to 15C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 16A to 16C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 18A to 18C are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- 19A and 19B are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- 20A and 20B are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- 21A and 21B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a display device.
- 22A and 22B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing an example of a display device;
- FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device;
- 24B and 24C are cross-sectional views showing examples of transistors.
- 25A to 25D are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- 28A and 28B are perspective views showing an example of a display module.
- 29A to 29C are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 34A is a block diagram showing an example of a display device.
- 34B to 34D are diagrams showing examples of pixel circuits.
- 35A to 35D are diagrams showing examples of transistors.
- 36A and 36B are diagrams illustrating examples of electronic devices.
- 37A and 37B are diagrams illustrating examples of electronic devices.
- 38A and 38B are diagrams illustrating examples of electronic devices.
- 39A to 39D are diagrams showing examples of electronic devices.
- 40A to 40G are diagrams showing examples of electronic devices.
- film and “layer” can be interchanged depending on the case or circumstances.
- conductive layer can be changed to the term “conductive film.”
- insulating film can be changed to the term “insulating layer”.
- a first layer (which can be referred to as an EL layer or part of an EL layer) including a light-emitting layer that emits light of a first color is formed over one surface.
- a first sacrificial layer is formed on the first layer.
- a first resist mask is formed over the first sacrificial layer, and the first layer and the first sacrificial layer are processed using the first resist mask, thereby forming an island-shaped first layer.
- a second layer (which can be called an EL layer or part of an EL layer) including a light-emitting layer that emits light of a second color is formed as a second sacrificial layer. and an island shape using a second resist mask.
- the island-shaped EL layer is not formed using a metal mask having a fine pattern, but after the EL layer is formed over the entire surface. Formed by processing. Therefore, it is possible to realize a high-definition display device or a display device with a high aperture ratio, which has hitherto been difficult to achieve. Furthermore, since the EL layer can be separately formed for each color, a display device with extremely vivid, high-contrast, and high-quality display can be realized.
- a sacrificial layer (which may also be referred to as a mask layer) over the EL layer, damage to the EL layer during the manufacturing process of the display device can be reduced, and the reliability of the light-emitting device can be improved.
- the gap can be narrowed to 500 nm or less, 200 nm or less, 100 nm or less, or even 50 nm or less.
- the aperture ratio can be brought close to 100%.
- the aperture ratio can be 50% or more, 60% or more, 70% or more, 80% or more, or even 90% or more, and less than 100%.
- the pattern of the EL layer itself (which can also be called a processing size) can be made much smaller than when a metal mask is used.
- the thickness of the EL layer varies between the center and the edge, so the effective area that can be used as the light emitting region is smaller than the area of the EL layer. Become.
- the manufacturing method described above since a film having a uniform thickness is processed, an island-shaped EL layer can be formed with a uniform thickness. Therefore, almost the entire area of even a fine pattern can be used as a light emitting region. Therefore, a display device having both high definition and high aperture ratio can be manufactured.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes a first conductive layer, a second conductive layer over the first conductive layer, and a light-emitting layer over the second conductive layer.
- the layer covers the side surface of the first conductive layer, and the end of the second conductive layer and the end of the light-emitting layer are aligned.
- One or both of the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer can be called a pixel electrode. With such a structure, the aperture ratio can be increased compared to a structure in which the end of the light emitting layer is located inside the end of the pixel electrode.
- the light-emitting layer is provided on and in contact with the second conductive layer.
- a structure in which the material of the surface on which the light-emitting layer is formed is uniform, a structure in which the material of the surface on which the light-emitting layer is formed changes depending on the location (for example, in the light-emitting layer, a region formed on the insulating layer and a region formed on the conductive layer.
- the characteristics of the light-emitting device can be enhanced compared to a configuration in which a formed region exists.
- the material for the second conductive layer the adhesion to the light-emitting layer can be enhanced.
- a material with high barrier properties for the second conductive layer the reliability of the light-emitting device can be improved.
- the first layer and the second layer each include at least a light-emitting layer, and preferably consist of a plurality of layers. Specifically, it is preferable to have one or more layers on the light-emitting layer. By providing another layer between the light-emitting layer and the sacrificial layer, the light-emitting layer can be prevented from being exposed to the outermost surface during the manufacturing process of the display device, and damage to the light-emitting layer can be reduced. This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device. Therefore, each of the first layer and the second layer preferably has a light-emitting layer and a carrier-transporting layer (electron-transporting layer or hole-transporting layer) on the light-emitting layer.
- a carrier-transporting layer electron-transporting layer or hole-transporting layer
- the layers included in the EL layer include a light emitting layer, a carrier injection layer (hole injection layer and electron injection layer), a carrier transport layer (hole transport layer and electron transport layer), and a carrier block layer (hole block layer and electron block layer).
- a carrier injection layer hole injection layer and electron injection layer
- a carrier transport layer hole transport layer and electron transport layer
- a carrier block layer hole block layer and electron block layer
- a layer and a common electrode are formed in common (as one film) for each color light emitting device.
- a carrier injection layer and a common electrode can be formed in common for each color light emitting device.
- the carrier injection layer is often a layer with relatively high conductivity among the EL layers. Therefore, the light-emitting device may be short-circuited when the carrier injection layer comes into contact with the side surface of a part of the EL layer formed like an island or the side surface of the pixel electrode.
- the common electrode is in contact with the side surface of the EL layer or the side surface of the pixel electrode, so that light emission is prevented.
- the device may short out.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes an insulating layer covering at least side surfaces of the island-shaped light-emitting layer.
- the space between the adjacent island-shaped EL layers can be filled. can be reduced and made more flat. Therefore, coverage of the carrier injection layer or common electrode can be improved. This can prevent disconnection of the common electrode.
- discontinuity refers to a phenomenon in which a layer, film, or electrode is divided due to the shape of a formation surface (for example, a step).
- the insulating layer can be provided so as to be in contact with the island-shaped EL layer. Thereby, peeling of the EL layer can be prevented. Adhesion between the insulating layer and the island-shaped EL layers brings about an effect that adjacent island-shaped EL layers are fixed or adhered by the insulating layer.
- opening of the cathode contact portion can also be performed at the same time. That is, the insulating layer can be formed without increasing the number of manufacturing steps for providing the opening. For example, when the insulating layer is formed of a photosensitive resin, the formation of the insulating layer and the exposure of the conductive layer in the cathode contact portion can be performed by one exposure.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes a pixel electrode functioning as an anode, and an island-shaped hole-injection layer, a hole-transport layer, a light-emitting layer, and an electron layer provided in this order on the pixel electrode.
- a common electrode provided on the electron injection layer and functioning as a cathode;
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes a pixel electrode functioning as a cathode, and an island-shaped electron-injection layer, an electron-transport layer, a light-emitting layer, and a positive electrode which are provided in this order over the pixel electrode.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes a pixel electrode, a first light-emitting unit over the pixel electrode, a charge-generation layer (also referred to as an intermediate layer) over the first light-emitting unit, and a second light-emitting unit; an insulating layer provided to cover respective side surfaces of the first light-emitting unit, the charge generation layer, and the second light-emitting unit; and an electrode.
- a common layer may be provided between the light emitting devices of each color between the second light emitting unit and the common electrode.
- a hole-injection layer, an electron-injection layer, a charge-generating layer, or the like is often a layer having relatively high conductivity among the EL layers.
- the side surfaces of these layers are covered with the insulating layer; therefore, contact with a common electrode or the like can be suppressed. Therefore, short-circuiting of the light-emitting device can be suppressed, and the reliability of the light-emitting device can be improved.
- a highly reliable display device with high definition or resolution can be manufactured.
- a special pixel arrangement method such as the pentile method
- there is no need to artificially increase the definition. device can be realized.
- a display device with a so-called stripe arrangement in which R, G, and B are arranged in one direction and a resolution of 500 ppi or more, 1000 ppi or more, or 2000 ppi or more, further 3000 ppi or more, and furthermore 5000 ppi or more can do.
- the insulating layer may have a single layer structure or a laminated structure.
- the first insulating layer is formed in contact with the EL layer, it is preferably formed using an inorganic insulating material.
- ALD atomic layer deposition
- the inorganic insulating layer is formed using a sputtering method, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method, or a plasma enhanced CVD (PECVD) method, which has a higher film formation rate than the ALD method. preferably formed. Accordingly, a highly reliable display device can be manufactured with high productivity.
- the second insulating layer is preferably formed using an organic material so as to planarize the concave portion formed in the first insulating layer.
- an aluminum oxide film formed by an ALD method can be used as the first insulating layer, and a photosensitive organic resin film can be used as the second insulating layer.
- an insulating layer having a single-layer structure may be formed.
- the insulating layer can be used as a protective insulating layer of the EL layer.
- the reliability of the display device can be improved.
- the insulating layer can be filled between adjacent EL layers to planarize the EL layers. Thereby, the coverage of the common electrode (upper electrode) formed over the EL layer and the insulating layer can be improved.
- the display device of this embodiment mode it is not necessary to provide an insulating layer covering the end portion of the pixel electrode between the pixel electrode and the EL layer, so that the distance between adjacent light-emitting devices can be extremely narrow. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve high definition or high resolution of the display device. Moreover, a mask for forming the insulating layer is not required, and the manufacturing cost of the display device can be reduced.
- [Configuration example 1 of display device] 1A to 1C illustrate a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 1A A top view of the display device 100 is shown in FIG. 1A.
- the display device 100 has a display section in which a plurality of pixels 110 are arranged in a matrix, and a connection section 140 outside the display section.
- the connection portion 140 can also be called a cathode contact portion.
- a stripe arrangement is applied to the pixels 110 shown in FIG. 1A.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 1A is composed of three sub-pixels, sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c each have light emitting devices that emit different colors of light.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c include sub-pixels of three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and three colors of yellow (Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M). sub-pixels and the like.
- the top surface shape of the sub-pixel shown in FIG. 1A corresponds to the top surface shape of the light emitting region.
- the circuit layout forming the sub-pixels is not limited to the range of the sub-pixels shown in FIG. 1A, and may be arranged outside the sub-pixels.
- some or all of the transistors included in sub-pixel 110a may be located outside of sub-pixel 110a shown in FIG. 1A.
- the transistor that sub-pixel 110a has may have a portion located within sub-pixel 110b and a portion located within sub-pixel 110c.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c have the same or approximately the same aperture ratio (size, which can also be called the size of the light emitting region), but one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this.
- the aperture ratios of the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c can be determined as appropriate.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c may have different aperture ratios, or two or more aperture ratios may be equal or substantially equal.
- FIG. 1A shows an example in which sub-pixels of different colors are arranged side by side in the X direction and sub-pixels of the same color are arranged side by side in the Y direction. Sub-pixels of different colors may be arranged side by side in the Y direction, and sub-pixels of the same color may be arranged side by side in the X direction.
- FIG. 1A shows an example in which the connection portion 140 is positioned below the display portion in a top view, but the present invention is not particularly limited.
- the connecting portion 140 may be provided at least one of the upper side, the right side, the left side, and the lower side of the display portion when viewed from above, and may be provided so as to surround the four sides of the display portion.
- the number of connection parts 140 may be singular or plural.
- FIG. 1B shows a cross-sectional view along the dashed-dotted line X1-X2 in FIG. 1A
- FIG. 1C shows a cross-sectional view along the dashed-dotted line Y1-Y2 in FIG. 1A.
- the display device 100 includes light emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c provided on a layer 101 including transistors, and a protective layer 131 covering these light emitting devices.
- a substrate 120 is bonded onto the protective layer 131 with a resin layer 122 .
- An insulating layer 125 and an insulating layer 127 on the insulating layer 125 are provided in a region between adjacent light emitting devices.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention is a top emission type in which light is emitted in a direction opposite to a substrate over which a light-emitting device is formed, and light is emitted toward a substrate over which a light-emitting device is formed.
- a bottom emission type bottom emission type
- a double emission type dual emission type in which light is emitted from both sides may be used.
- the layer 101 including transistors for example, a stacked-layer structure in which a plurality of transistors are provided over a substrate and an insulating layer is provided to cover the transistors can be applied.
- the layer 101 containing transistors may have recesses between adjacent light emitting devices.
- recesses may be provided in the insulating layer located on the outermost surface of the layer 101 including the transistor.
- FIG. 3 A structural example of the layer 101 including a transistor will be described later in Embodiments 3 and 4.
- the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c are electrically connected to transistors provided in the layer 101 including transistors.
- the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c can be said to be layers that electrically connect the light-emitting device and the transistor.
- the conductive layers 111a, 111b, 111c can be part of the pixel electrodes of the light emitting device.
- a layer 128 is preferably embedded in the concave portions of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c. It is preferable to form the conductive layer 112a over the conductive layer 111a and the layer 128, form the conductive layer 112b over the conductive layer 111b and the layer 128, and form the conductive layer 112c over the conductive layer 111c and the layer 128.
- the conductive layers 112a, 112b, 112c function as pixel electrodes of the light emitting device.
- the layer 128 has a function of planarizing recesses of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c.
- unevenness of the surface on which the EL layer is formed can be reduced, and coverage can be improved.
- the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c electrically connected to the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c over the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c and the layer 128, the concave portions of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c are formed.
- a region overlapping with can also be used as a light-emitting region. Thereby, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased.
- Layer 128 may be an insulating layer or a conductive layer.
- Various inorganic insulating materials, organic insulating materials, and conductive materials can be used as appropriate for layer 128 .
- layer 128 is preferably formed using an insulating material.
- an insulating layer containing an organic material can be preferably used.
- an acrylic resin, a polyimide resin, an epoxy resin, a polyamide resin, a polyimideamide resin, a siloxane resin, a benzocyclobutene resin, a phenol resin, precursors of these resins, or the like can be applied.
- a photosensitive resin can be used as the layer 128 .
- a positive material or a negative material can be used for the photosensitive resin.
- the conductive layer 112 a is provided over the conductive layer 111 a and the layer 128 .
- the conductive layer 112 a has a first region in contact with the top surface of the conductive layer 111 a and a second region in contact with the top surface of the layer 128 . It is preferable that the height of the top surface of the conductive layer 111a in contact with the first region and the height of the top surface of the layer 128 in contact with the second region match or substantially match.
- Conductive layer 112 b is provided over conductive layer 111 b and layer 128 .
- Conductive layer 112 b has a first region that contacts the top surface of conductive layer 111 b and a second region that contacts the top surface of layer 128 . It is preferable that the height of the upper surface of the conductive layer 111b in contact with the first region and the height of the upper surface of the layer 128 in contact with the second region match or substantially match.
- the conductive layer 112 c is provided over the conductive layer 111 c and the layer 128 .
- the conductive layer 112 c has a first region in contact with the top surface of the conductive layer 111 c and a second region in contact with the top surface of the layer 128 . It is preferable that the height of the top surface of the conductive layer 111c in contact with the first region and the height of the top surface of the layer 128 in contact with the second region match or substantially match.
- Light emitting devices 130a, 130b, 130c each emit different colors of light.
- Light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c are preferably a combination that emits three colors of light, red (R), green (G), and blue (B), for example.
- light emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c for example, OLEDs (Organic Light Emitting Diodes) or QLEDs (Quantum-dot Light Emitting Diodes) are preferably used.
- Light-emitting substances (also referred to as light-emitting materials) included in the light-emitting device include substances that emit fluorescence (fluorescent materials), substances that emit phosphorescence (phosphorescent materials), and substances that exhibit thermally activated delayed fluorescence (thermally activated delayed fluorescence). delayed fluorescence (TADF) materials) and the like.
- TADF material a material in which a singlet excited state and a triplet excited state are in thermal equilibrium may be used.
- TADF material has a short emission lifetime (excitation lifetime), it is possible to suppress a decrease in efficiency in a high-luminance region of a light-emitting device.
- an inorganic compound quantum dot material, etc. may be used as a light-emitting substance included in the light-emitting device.
- a light-emitting device has an EL layer between a pair of electrodes.
- one of a pair of electrodes may be referred to as a pixel electrode and the other may be referred to as a common electrode.
- one electrode functions as an anode and the other electrode functions as a cathode.
- the pixel electrode functions as an anode and the common electrode functions as a cathode will be described below as an example.
- the light-emitting device 130a includes a conductive layer 112a over the layer 101 including the transistor, a conductive layer 126a over the conductive layer 112a, a conductive layer 129a over the conductive layer 126a, and an island-shaped first layer 113a over the conductive layer 129a. , a fourth layer 114 on the island-shaped first layer 113 a , and a common electrode 115 on the fourth layer 114 .
- the conductive layer 111a may also be regarded as a component of the light emitting device 130a.
- the conductive layer 112a can function as a pixel electrode of the light emitting device 130a.
- the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a functions as a pixel electrode of the light-emitting device 130a.
- the conductive layer 112a, the conductive layer 126a, and the conductive layer 129a at least a layer that functions as a pixel electrode of the light-emitting device 130a is provided, and other conductive layers are not necessarily provided.
- the first layer 113a and the fourth layer 114 can be collectively called an EL layer.
- the structure of the light-emitting device of this embodiment is not particularly limited, and may be a single structure or a tandem structure. Note that a configuration example of the light-emitting device will be described later in Embodiment Mode 2.
- the light emitting device 130b includes a conductive layer 112b on the layer 101 containing the transistor, a conductive layer 126b on the conductive layer 112b, a conductive layer 129b on the conductive layer 126b, and an island-shaped second layer 113b on the conductive layer 129b. , a fourth layer 114 on the island-shaped second layer 113 b , and a common electrode 115 on the fourth layer 114 .
- the conductive layer 111b may also be regarded as a component of the light emitting device 130b.
- the conductive layer 112b can function as a pixel electrode of the light emitting device 130b.
- the conductive layers 111b, 112b, 126b, and 129b functions as a pixel electrode of the light-emitting device 130b.
- the conductive layer 112b, the conductive layer 126b, and the conductive layer 129b at least a layer that functions as a pixel electrode of the light-emitting device 130b is provided, and the other conductive layers are not necessarily provided.
- the second layer 113b and the fourth layer 114 can be collectively called an EL layer.
- the light-emitting device 130c includes a conductive layer 112c on the layer 101 including the transistor, a conductive layer 126c on the conductive layer 112c, a conductive layer 129c on the conductive layer 126c, and an island-like third layer 113c on the conductive layer 129c. , a fourth layer 114 on the island-shaped third layer 113 c , and a common electrode 115 on the fourth layer 114 .
- the conductive layer 111c may also be regarded as a component of the light emitting device 130c.
- Conductive layer 112c can function as a pixel electrode of light emitting device 130c.
- the conductive layers 111c, 112c, 126c, and 129c functions as a pixel electrode of the light-emitting device 130c.
- the conductive layer 112c, the conductive layer 126c, and the conductive layer 129c at least a layer that functions as a pixel electrode of the light-emitting device 130c is provided, and other conductive layers are not necessarily provided.
- the third layer 113c and the fourth layer 114 can be collectively referred to as EL layers.
- Light-emitting devices of each color share the same film as a common electrode.
- a common electrode 115 shared by the light emitting devices of each color is electrically connected to the conductive layer 123c provided in the connecting portion 140 (see FIG. 1C).
- the connection portion 140 can be provided with a conductive layer formed using the same material and in the same process as at least one of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a.
- FIG. 1C shows an example in which three conductive layers 123a, 123b, and 123c are formed using the same material and in the same steps as the conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 129a.
- the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a have different end positions. Specifically, the end of the conductive layer 112a is positioned outside the end of the conductive layer 111a, the end of the conductive layer 126a is positioned outside the end of the conductive layer 112a, and the end of the conductive layer 126a is positioned outside the end of the conductive layer 112a. An end portion of the conductive layer 129a is located outside the portion.
- the shapes of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 1B. For example, the edges of at least two conductive layers may be aligned or substantially aligned. In other words, the top surface shapes of at least two conductive layers may match or substantially match.
- the ends are aligned or substantially aligned, and when the top surface shapes are matched or substantially matched, at least part of the outline overlaps between the stacked layers when viewed from the top.
- the upper layer and the lower layer may be processed with the same mask pattern or partially with the same mask pattern.
- the outlines do not overlap, and the top layer may be located inside the bottom layer, or the top layer may be located outside the bottom layer, and in this case also the edges are roughly aligned, or the shape of the top surface are said to roughly match.
- first layer 113a covers the sides of conductive layer 111a, conductive layer 112a, and conductive layer 126a. Further, the edge of the first layer 113a and the edge of the conductive layer 129a are aligned or substantially aligned. In addition, the end of the first layer 113a is located outside the end of each of the conductive layer 111a, the conductive layer 112a, and the conductive layer 126a. With such a structure, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased.
- the first layer 113a preferably covers the side surfaces of at least one of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a.
- the edge of the first layer 113a is preferably aligned or substantially aligned with the edge of at least one of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a. The same applies to the light emitting devices 130b and 130c.
- the fourth layer 114 (or the common electrode 115) is in contact with any side surface of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. It is possible to suppress the short circuit of the light emitting device.
- the insulating layer 125 can be in contact with side surfaces of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- the insulating layer 127 is provided on the insulating layer 125 so as to fill the recess formed in the insulating layer 125 .
- the insulating layer 127 can overlap with the side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c with the insulating layer 125 interposed therebetween (it can be said that the insulating layer 127 covers the side surfaces). can. Further, the insulating layer 127 can overlap with side surfaces of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c with the insulating layer 125 interposed therebetween.
- one of the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 may be omitted.
- the insulating layer 127 is in contact with side surfaces of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. can do.
- the insulating layer 127 can be provided so as to fill the space between the EL layers of each light-emitting device.
- One or both of the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 fills the space between the EL layers of each light-emitting device, whereby peeling of the EL layer can be prevented and the reliability of the light-emitting device can be improved. Moreover, the production yield of the light-emitting device can be increased.
- One or both of the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 may cover part of the top surface of each of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- One or both of the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 cover not only the side surface of the EL layer but also the top surface thereof, whereby peeling of the EL layer can be further prevented and the reliability of the light-emitting device can be improved. Moreover, the manufacturing yield of the light-emitting device can be further increased.
- a sacrificial layer 118a is located on the first layer 113a.
- one edge of the sacrificial layer 118a is aligned or nearly aligned with the edge of the first layer 113a, and the other edge of the sacrificial layer 118a is on the first layer 113a.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a sacrificial layer remaining which was used in manufacturing the display device. The same applies to the sacrificial layer 118b on the second layer 113b and the sacrificial layer 118c on the third layer 113c.
- one edge of the sacrificial layer 118b is aligned or substantially aligned with the edge of the second layer 113b.
- the other end of sacrificial layer 118b is located on second layer 113b.
- One edge of the sacrificial layer 118c is aligned or nearly aligned with the edge of the third layer 113c.
- the other end of sacrificial layer 118c is located on third layer 113c.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have one or more of the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c, or can have none of the three sacrificial layers.
- One or both of the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 may be provided on the sacrificial layer 118a. Similarly, one or both of insulating layer 125 and insulating layer 127 may be provided on sacrificial layer 118b and sacrificial layer 118c.
- the fourth layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are provided over the first layer 113 a , the second layer 113 b , the third layer 113 c , the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 .
- a step is caused between a region where the pixel electrode and the EL layer are provided and a region where the pixel electrode and the EL layer are not provided (a region between the light emitting devices). ing. Since the display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 , the step can be planarized, and coverage with the fourth layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a connection failure due to step disconnection of the common electrode 115 . Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the common electrode 115 from being locally thinned due to a step and increasing the electrical resistance.
- the heights of the upper surface of the insulating layer 125 and the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 are adjusted to the heights of the first layer 113a and the second layer 113b, respectively. , and the height of at least one top surface of the third layer 113c.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 preferably has a flat shape, and may have a convex portion, a convex curved surface, a concave curved surface, or a concave portion.
- the insulating layer 125 has regions that are in contact with the side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. It functions as a protective insulating layer for layer 113c.
- impurities oxygen, moisture, or the like
- It can be an expensive display device.
- the width (thickness) of the insulating layer 125 in the region in contact with the side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c in a cross-sectional view is large, the first layer 113a and the second layer 113a have a large width (thickness). A gap between the layer 113b and the third layer 113c is increased, and the aperture ratio is lowered in some cases.
- the width (thickness) of the insulating layer 125 is small, the effect of suppressing the intrusion of impurities into the inside from the side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c is small. It may become.
- the width (thickness) of the insulating layer 125 in the region in contact with the side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c is preferably 3 nm or more and 200 nm or less, more preferably 3 nm or more and 150 nm or less. It is preferably 5 nm or more and 150 nm or less, further preferably 5 nm or more and 100 nm or less, further preferably 10 nm or more and 100 nm or less, further preferably 10 nm or more and 50 nm or less.
- Insulating layer 125 can be an insulating layer comprising an inorganic material.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, or a nitride oxide insulating film can be used, for example.
- the insulating layer 125 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure.
- the oxide insulating film includes a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, an indium gallium zinc oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a germanium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, and an oxide film.
- Examples include a hafnium film and a tantalum oxide film.
- Examples of the nitride insulating film include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film.
- As the oxynitride insulating film a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, or the like can be given.
- nitride oxide insulating film a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, or the like can be given.
- aluminum oxide is preferable because it has a high etching selectivity with respect to the EL layer and has a function of protecting the EL layer during formation of the insulating layer 127 described later.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an aluminum oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, or a silicon oxide film formed by an ALD method to the insulating layer 125, the insulating layer 125 with few pinholes and an excellent function of protecting the EL layer can be obtained. can be formed.
- oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen. point to the material.
- silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen. indicates
- a sputtering method, a CVD method, a PLD method, an ALD method, or the like can be used to form the insulating layer 125 .
- the insulating layer 125 is preferably formed by an ALD method with good coverage.
- the insulating layer 127 provided on the insulating layer 125 has a function of planarizing the concave portions of the insulating layer 125 formed between adjacent light emitting devices. In other words, the presence of the insulating layer 127 has the effect of improving the flatness of the surface on which the common electrode 115 is formed.
- an insulating layer containing an organic material can be preferably used.
- acrylic resin, polyimide resin, epoxy resin, imide resin, polyamide resin, polyimideamide resin, silicone resin, siloxane resin, benzocyclobutene-based resin, phenolic resin, and precursors of these resins are applied. can do.
- an organic material such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin may be used for the insulating layer 127 .
- a photosensitive resin can be used as the insulating layer 127 .
- a photoresist may be used as the photosensitive resin.
- a positive material or a negative material can be used for the photosensitive resin.
- the difference between the height of the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 and the height of the upper surface of any one of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c is, for example, 0 of the thickness of the insulating layer 127. 0.5 times or less is preferable, and 0.3 times or less is more preferable. Further, for example, the insulating layer 127 may be provided so that the top surface of any one of the first layer 113 a , the second layer 113 b , and the third layer 113 c is higher than the top surface of the insulating layer 127 .
- the insulating layer 127 may be provided so that the top surface of the insulating layer 127 is higher than the top surface of the light-emitting layer included in the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, or the third layer 113c. good.
- a conductive film that transmits visible light is used for the electrode on the light extraction side of the pixel electrode and the common electrode.
- a conductive film that reflects visible light is preferably used for the electrode on the side from which light is not extracted.
- indium tin oxide also referred to as In—Sn oxide, ITO
- In—Si—Sn oxide also referred to as ITSO
- indium zinc oxide In—Zn oxide
- In—W— Zn oxide alloys containing aluminum (aluminum alloys) such as alloys of aluminum, nickel and lanthanum (Al-Ni-La), as well as alloys of silver and magnesium, alloys of silver, palladium and copper (Ag-Pd- Cu, also referred to as APC) and other silver-containing alloys.
- elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the periodic table of elements not exemplified above e.g., lithium (Li), cesium (Cs), calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr)), europium (Eu), ytterbium
- Yb rare earth metal
- an alloy containing an appropriate combination thereof, graphene, or the like can be used.
- the light-emitting device preferably employs a micro-optical resonator (microcavity) structure. Therefore, one of the pair of electrodes of the light-emitting device preferably has an electrode (semi-transmissive/semi-reflective electrode) that is transparent and reflective to visible light, and the other is an electrode that is reflective to visible light ( reflective electrode). Since the light-emitting device has a microcavity structure, the light emitted from the light-emitting layer can be resonated between both electrodes, and the light emitted from the light-emitting device can be enhanced.
- microcavity micro-optical resonator
- the semi-transmissive/semi-reflective electrode can have a laminated structure of a reflective electrode and an electrode (also referred to as a transparent electrode) having transparency to visible light.
- the light transmittance of the transparent electrode is set to 40% or more.
- the light-emitting device preferably uses an electrode having a transmittance of 40% or more for visible light (light with a wavelength of 400 nm or more and less than 750 nm).
- the visible light reflectance of the semi-transmissive/semi-reflective electrode is 10% or more and 95% or less, preferably 30% or more and 80% or less.
- the visible light reflectance of the reflective electrode is 40% or more and 100% or less, preferably 70% or more and 100% or less.
- the resistivity of these electrodes is preferably 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ cm or less.
- conductive layers functioning as reflective electrodes may be used for the conductive layers 111a and 112a
- conductive layers functioning as transparent electrodes may be used for the conductive layers 126a and 129a
- a metal such as titanium is used for the conductive layer 111a
- a metal such as aluminum or an alloy such as APC is used for the conductive layer 112a
- a metal oxide such as titanium oxide or ITSO is used for the conductive layers 126a and 129a. can be used.
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are each provided in an island shape.
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c each have a light-emitting layer.
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c preferably have light-emitting layers that emit light of different colors.
- a light-emitting layer is a layer containing a light-emitting substance.
- the emissive layer can have one or more emissive materials.
- a substance exhibiting emission colors such as blue, purple, violet, green, yellow-green, yellow, orange, and red is used as appropriate.
- a substance that emits near-infrared light can be used as the light-emitting substance.
- Examples of light-emitting substances include fluorescent materials, phosphorescent materials, TADF materials, and quantum dot materials.
- fluorescent materials include pyrene derivatives, anthracene derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, carbazole derivatives, dibenzothiophene derivatives, dibenzofuran derivatives, dibenzoquinoxaline derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, pyridine derivatives, pyrimidine derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, and naphthalene derivatives. be done.
- Examples of phosphorescent materials include organometallic complexes (especially iridium complexes) having a 4H-triazole skeleton, 1H-triazole skeleton, imidazole skeleton, pyrimidine skeleton, pyrazine skeleton, or pyridine skeleton, and phenylpyridine derivatives having an electron-withdrawing group.
- organometallic complexes especially iridium complexes
- platinum complexes, rare earth metal complexes, etc. which are used as ligands, can be mentioned.
- the light-emitting layer may contain one or more organic compounds (host material, assist material, etc.) in addition to the light-emitting substance (guest material).
- One or both of a hole-transporting material and an electron-transporting material can be used as the one or more organic compounds.
- Bipolar materials or TADF materials may also be used as one or more organic compounds.
- the light-emitting layer preferably includes, for example, a phosphorescent material and a combination of a hole-transporting material and an electron-transporting material that easily form an exciplex.
- ExTET Exciplex-Triplet Energy Transfer
- a combination that forms an exciplex that emits light that overlaps with the wavelength of the absorption band on the lowest energy side of the light-emitting substance energy transfer becomes smooth and light emission can be efficiently obtained. With this configuration, high efficiency, low-voltage driving, and long life of the light-emitting device can be realized at the same time.
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are layers other than the light-emitting layer, which are a substance with a high hole-injection property and a substance with a high hole-transport property (also called a hole-transport material). ), hole-blocking material, highly electron-transporting substance (also referred to as electron-transporting material), highly electron-injecting substance, electron-blocking material, or bipolar substance (highly electron- and hole-transporting It may further have a layer containing a substance (also referred to as a bipolar material).
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are respectively a hole-injecting layer, a hole-transporting layer, a hole-blocking layer, an electron-blocking layer, an electron-transporting layer, and an electron layer. It may have one or more of the injection layers.
- the layer commonly formed in the light-emitting devices of each color includes one of a hole-injection layer, a hole-transport layer, a hole-blocking layer, an electron-blocking layer, an electron-transporting layer, and an electron-injecting layer. More than one can apply.
- a carrier injection layer (hole injection layer or electron injection layer) may be formed as the fourth layer 114 .
- all layers of the EL layer may be formed separately for each color. In other words, the EL layer does not have to have a layer that is commonly formed for the light-emitting devices of each color.
- Each of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c preferably has a light-emitting layer and a carrier transport layer over the light-emitting layer.
- the hole-injecting layer is a layer that injects holes from the anode to the hole-transporting layer, and contains a substance having a high hole-injecting property.
- Substances with high hole-injection properties include aromatic amine compounds and composite materials containing a hole-transporting material and an acceptor material (electron-accepting material).
- the hole-transporting layer is a layer that transports the holes injected from the anode through the hole-injecting layer to the light-emitting layer.
- a hole-transporting layer is a layer containing a hole-transporting material.
- the hole-transporting material a substance having a hole mobility of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 cm 2 /Vs or more is preferable. Note that substances other than these can be used as long as they have a higher hole-transport property than electron-transport property.
- hole-transporting materials include ⁇ -electron-rich heteroaromatic compounds (e.g., carbazole derivatives, thiophene derivatives, furan derivatives, etc.), aromatic amines (compounds having an aromatic amine skeleton), and other substances with high hole-transporting properties. is preferred.
- ⁇ -electron-rich heteroaromatic compounds e.g., carbazole derivatives, thiophene derivatives, furan derivatives, etc.
- aromatic amines compounds having an aromatic amine skeleton
- other substances with high hole-transporting properties is preferred.
- the electron transport layer is a layer that transports electrons injected from the cathode by the electron injection layer to the light emitting layer.
- the electron-transporting layer is a layer containing an electron-transporting material.
- an electron-transporting material a substance having an electron mobility of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 cm 2 /Vs or more is preferable. Note that substances other than these substances can be used as long as they have a higher electron-transport property than hole-transport property.
- electron-transporting materials include metal complexes having a quinoline skeleton, metal complexes having a benzoquinoline skeleton, metal complexes having an oxazole skeleton, metal complexes having a thiazole skeleton, oxadiazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, ⁇ -electrons including oxazole derivatives, thiazole derivatives, phenanthroline derivatives, quinoline derivatives with quinoline ligands, benzoquinoline derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, dibenzoquinoxaline derivatives, pyridine derivatives, bipyridine derivatives, pyrimidine derivatives, and other nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic compounds
- a substance having a high electron-transport property such as a deficient heteroaromatic compound can be used.
- the electron injection layer is a layer that injects electrons from the cathode to the electron transport layer, and is a layer that contains a substance with high electron injection properties.
- Alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, or compounds thereof can be used as the substance with a high electron-injecting property.
- a composite material containing an electron-transporting material and a donor material (electron-donating material) can also be used as the substance with high electron-injecting properties.
- the electron injection layer examples include lithium, cesium, ytterbium, lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calcium fluoride (CaF x , X is an arbitrary number), and 8-(quinolinolato)lithium (abbreviation: Liq), 2-(2-pyridyl)phenoratritium (abbreviation: LiPP), 2-(2-pyridyl)-3-pyridinolatritium (abbreviation: LiPPy), 4-phenyl-2-(2-pyridyl)pheno Alkali metals such as latolithium (abbreviation: LiPPP), lithium oxide (LiO x ), cesium carbonate, alkaline earth metals, or compounds thereof can be used.
- the electron injection layer may have a laminated structure of two or more layers. As the laminated structure, for example, lithium fluoride can be used for the first layer and ytterbium can be used for the second layer.
- an electron-transporting material may be used as the electron injection layer.
- a compound having a lone pair of electrons and an electron-deficient heteroaromatic ring can be used as the electron-transporting material.
- a compound having at least one of a pyridine ring, diazine ring (pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring), and triazine ring can be used.
- the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) of the organic compound having an unshared electron pair is preferably ⁇ 3.6 eV or more and ⁇ 2.3 eV or less.
- CV cyclic voltammetry
- photoelectron spectroscopy optical absorption spectroscopy
- inverse photoelectron spectroscopy etc. are used to determine the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO: Highest Occupied Molecular Orbital) level and LUMO level of an organic compound. can be estimated.
- BPhen 4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- NBPhen 2,9-bis(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- HATNA diquinoxalino [2,3-a:2′,3′-c]phenazine
- TmPPPyTz 2,4,6-tris[3′-(pyridin-3-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]-1,3 , 5-triazine
- TmPPPyTz 2,4,6-tris[3′-(pyridin-3-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]-1,3 , 5-triazine
- a charge-generating layer (also referred to as an intermediate layer) is provided between two light-emitting units.
- the charge-generating layer has a function of injecting electrons into one of the two light-emitting units and holes into the other when a voltage is applied between the pair of electrodes.
- the charge generation layer has at least a charge generation region.
- the charge generation region preferably contains an acceptor material, for example, preferably contains a hole transport material and an acceptor material applicable to the hole injection layer described above.
- the charge generation layer preferably has a layer containing a substance having a high electron injection property.
- This layer can also be called an electron injection buffer layer.
- the electron injection buffer layer is preferably provided between the charge generation region and the electron transport layer. Since the injection barrier between the charge generation region and the electron transport layer can be relaxed by providing the electron injection buffer layer, electrons generated in the charge generation region can be easily injected into the electron transport layer.
- the electron injection buffer layer preferably contains an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal, and can be configured to contain, for example, an alkali metal compound or an alkaline earth metal compound.
- the electron injection buffer layer preferably has an inorganic compound containing an alkali metal and oxygen, or an inorganic compound containing an alkaline earth metal and oxygen. Lithium (Li 2 O), etc.) is more preferred.
- the above materials applicable to the electron injection layer can be preferably used.
- the charge generation layer preferably has a layer containing a substance having a high electron transport property. Such layers may also be referred to as electron relay layers.
- the electron relay layer is preferably provided between the charge generation region and the electron injection buffer layer. If the charge generation layer does not have an electron injection buffer layer, the electron relay layer is preferably provided between the charge generation region and the electron transport layer.
- the electron relay layer has a function of smoothly transferring electrons by preventing interaction between the charge generation region and the electron injection buffer layer (or electron transport layer).
- a phthalocyanine-based material such as copper (II) phthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPc), or a metal complex having a metal-oxygen bond and an aromatic ligand.
- charge generation region electron injection buffer layer, and electron relay layer may not be clearly distinguished depending on their cross-sectional shape, characteristics, or the like.
- the charge generation layer may contain a donor material instead of the acceptor material.
- the charge-generating layer may have a layer containing an electron-transporting material and a donor material, which are applicable to the electron-injecting layer described above.
- Either a low-molecular-weight compound or a high-molecular-weight compound can be used in the light-emitting device, and an inorganic compound may be included.
- Each of the layers constituting the light-emitting device can be formed by a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, or the like.
- the protective layer 131 may have a single layer structure or a laminated structure of two or more layers.
- At least one of an insulating film, a semiconductor film, and a conductive film can be used as the protective layer 131 .
- the protective layer 131 has an inorganic film, deterioration of the light-emitting devices is suppressed, such as preventing oxidation of the common electrode 115 and suppressing impurities (moisture, oxygen, etc.) from entering the light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c. Therefore, the reliability of the display device can be improved.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, or a nitride oxide insulating film can be used.
- the oxide insulating film include a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a germanium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a tantalum oxide film, and the like.
- nitride insulating film examples include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film.
- oxynitride insulating film a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, or the like can be given.
- nitride oxide insulating film a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, or the like can be given.
- the protective layer 131 preferably has a nitride insulating film or a nitride oxide insulating film, and more preferably has a nitride insulating film.
- the protective layer 131 contains ITO, In—Zn oxide, Ga—Zn oxide, Al—Zn oxide, indium gallium zinc oxide (also referred to as In—Ga—Zn oxide, IGZO), or the like.
- Inorganic membranes can also be used.
- the inorganic film preferably has a high resistance, and specifically, preferably has a higher resistance than the common electrode 115 .
- the inorganic film may further contain nitrogen.
- the protective layer 131 When the light emitted from the light-emitting device is taken out through the protective layer 131, the protective layer 131 preferably has high transparency to visible light.
- the protective layer 131 preferably has high transparency to visible light.
- ITO, IGZO, and aluminum oxide are preferable because they are inorganic materials with high transparency to visible light.
- the protective layer 131 for example, a stacked structure of an aluminum oxide film and a silicon nitride film over the aluminum oxide film, or a stacked structure of an aluminum oxide film and an IGZO film over the aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used. can be done. By using the stacked structure, entry of impurities (water, oxygen, or the like) into the EL layer can be suppressed.
- the protective layer 131 may have an organic film.
- protective layer 131 may have both an organic film and an inorganic film.
- the protective layer 131 may have a two-layer structure formed using different film formation methods. Specifically, the first layer of the protective layer 131 may be formed using the ALD method, and the second layer of the protective layer 131 may be formed using the sputtering method.
- the edge of the upper surface of the pixel electrode is not covered with the insulating layer. Therefore, the interval between adjacent light emitting devices can be made very narrow. Therefore, a high-definition or high-resolution display device can be obtained.
- a device manufactured using a metal mask or FMM may be referred to as a device with an MM (metal mask) structure.
- a device manufactured without using a metal mask or FMM may be referred to as a device with an MML (metal maskless) structure.
- SBS Side By Side
- the material and structure can be optimized for each light-emitting device, so the degree of freedom in selecting the material and structure increases, and it becomes easy to improve luminance and reliability.
- a light-emitting device capable of emitting white light is sometimes referred to as a white light-emitting device.
- a white light emitting device can be combined with a colored layer (for example, a color filter) to realize a full-color display device.
- light-emitting devices can be broadly classified into a single structure and a tandem structure.
- a single-structure device preferably has one light-emitting unit between a pair of electrodes, and the light-emitting unit preferably includes one or more light-emitting layers.
- light-emitting layers may be selected such that the colors of light emitted from the two light-emitting layers are in a complementary color relationship. For example, by making the luminescent color of the first luminescent layer and the luminescent color of the second luminescent layer have a complementary color relationship, it is possible to obtain a configuration in which the entire light emitting device emits white light.
- the light-emitting device as a whole may emit white light by combining the light-emitting colors of the three or more light-emitting layers.
- a device with a tandem structure preferably has two or more light-emitting units between a pair of electrodes, and each light-emitting unit includes one or more light-emitting layers.
- each light-emitting unit includes one or more light-emitting layers.
- a structure in which white light emission is obtained by combining light from the light emitting layers of a plurality of light emitting units may be employed. Note that the structure for obtaining white light emission is the same as the structure of the single structure. Note that in a tandem structure device, it is preferable to provide a charge generation layer between a plurality of light emitting units.
- the white light emitting device when comparing the white light emitting device (single structure or tandem structure) and the light emitting device having the SBS structure, the light emitting device having the SBS structure can consume less power than the white light emitting device. If it is desired to keep power consumption low, it is preferable to use a light-emitting device with an SBS structure. On the other hand, the white light emitting device is preferable because the manufacturing process is simpler than that of the SBS structure light emitting device, so that the manufacturing cost can be lowered or the manufacturing yield can be increased.
- the distance between the light-emitting devices can be reduced.
- the distance between light-emitting devices, the distance between EL layers, or the distance between pixel electrodes is less than 10 ⁇ m, 5 ⁇ m or less, 3 ⁇ m or less, 2 ⁇ m or less, 1 ⁇ m or less, 500 nm or less, 200 nm or less, 100 nm or less, or 90 nm or less. , 70 nm or less, 50 nm or less, 30 nm or less, 20 nm or less, 15 nm or less, or 10 nm or less.
- the space between the side surface of the first layer 113a and the side surface of the second layer 113b or the space between the side surface of the second layer 113b and the side surface of the third layer 113c is 1 ⁇ m or less. , preferably has a region of 0.5 ⁇ m (500 nm) or less, and more preferably has a region of 100 nm or less.
- a light shielding layer may be provided on the surface of the substrate 120 on the resin layer 122 side.
- various optical members can be arranged outside the substrate 120 .
- optical members include polarizing plates, retardation plates, light diffusion layers (diffusion films, etc.), antireflection layers, light collecting films, and the like.
- an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust, a water-repellent film that prevents adhesion of dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use, a shock absorption layer, etc. are arranged on the outside of the substrate 120.
- an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust
- a water-repellent film that prevents adhesion of dirt
- a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use
- a shock absorption layer, etc. are arranged.
- Glass, quartz, ceramic, sapphire, resin, metal, alloy, semiconductor, or the like can be used for the substrate 120 .
- a material that transmits the light is used for the substrate on the side from which the light from the light-emitting device is extracted.
- a flexible material is used for the substrate 120, the flexibility of the display device can be increased and a flexible display can be realized.
- a polarizing plate may be used as the substrate 120 .
- polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyacrylonitrile resins, acrylic resins, polyimide resins, polymethyl methacrylate resins, polycarbonate (PC) resins, and polyethersulfone (PES) resins.
- polyamide resin nylon, aramid, etc.
- polysiloxane resin cycloolefin resin
- polystyrene resin polyamideimide resin
- polyurethane resin polyvinyl chloride resin
- polyvinylidene chloride resin polypropylene resin
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- ABS resin cellulose nanofiber, etc.
- glass having a thickness that is flexible may be used.
- a substrate having high optical isotropy is preferably used as the substrate of the display device.
- a substrate with high optical isotropy has small birefringence (it can be said that the amount of birefringence is small).
- the absolute value of the retardation (retardation) value of the substrate with high optical isotropy is preferably 30 nm or less, more preferably 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 10 nm or less.
- Films with high optical isotropy include triacetylcellulose (TAC, also called cellulose triacetate) films, cycloolefin polymer (COP) films, cycloolefin copolymer (COC) films, and acrylic films.
- TAC triacetylcellulose
- COP cycloolefin polymer
- COC cycloolefin copolymer
- the film when a film is used as the substrate, the film may absorb water, which may cause a change in shape such as wrinkling of the display panel. Therefore, it is preferable to use a film having a low water absorption rate as the substrate. For example, it is preferable to use a film with a water absorption of 1% or less, more preferably 0.1% or less, and even more preferably 0.01% or less.
- various curable adhesives such as photocurable adhesives such as ultraviolet curable adhesives, reaction curable adhesives, thermosetting adhesives, and anaerobic adhesives can be used.
- These adhesives include epoxy resins, acrylic resins, silicone resins, phenol resins, polyimide resins, imide resins, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resins, PVB (polyvinyl butyral) resins, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resins, and the like.
- a material with low moisture permeability such as epoxy resin is preferable.
- a two-liquid mixed type resin may be used.
- an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.
- materials that can be used for conductive layers such as various wirings and electrodes constituting display devices include aluminum, titanium, chromium, nickel, copper, yttrium, zirconium, molybdenum, silver, Examples include metals such as tantalum and tungsten, and alloys containing these metals as main components. A film containing these materials can be used as a single layer or as a laminated structure.
- a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide containing gallium, or graphene
- metal materials such as gold, silver, platinum, magnesium, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, palladium, and titanium, or alloy materials containing such metal materials can be used.
- a nitride of the metal material eg, titanium nitride
- it is preferably thin enough to have translucency.
- a stacked film of any of the above materials can be used as the conductive layer.
- a laminated film of a silver-magnesium alloy and indium tin oxide because the conductivity can be increased.
- conductive layers such as various wirings and electrodes that constitute a display device, and conductive layers (conductive layers functioning as pixel electrodes or common electrodes) of light-emitting devices.
- Examples of insulating materials that can be used for each insulating layer include resins such as acrylic resins and epoxy resins, and inorganic insulating materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, and aluminum oxide.
- the arrangement of sub-pixels includes, for example, a stripe arrangement, an S-stripe arrangement, a matrix arrangement, a delta arrangement, a Bayer arrangement, and a pentile arrangement.
- top surface shapes of sub-pixels include triangles, quadrilaterals (including rectangles and squares), polygons such as pentagons, shapes with rounded corners, ellipses, and circles.
- the top surface shape of the sub-pixel corresponds to the top surface shape of the light emitting region of the light emitting device.
- the S-stripe arrangement is applied to the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 2A.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 2A is composed of three sub-pixels, sub-pixels 110a, 110b and 110c.
- the sub-pixel 110a may be the blue sub-pixel B
- the sub-pixel 110b may be the red sub-pixel R
- the sub-pixel 110c may be the green sub-pixel G.
- FIG. 3A the sub-pixel 110a may be the blue sub-pixel B
- the sub-pixel 110b may be the red sub-pixel R
- the sub-pixel 110c may be the green sub-pixel G.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 2B includes a subpixel 110a having a substantially trapezoidal top surface shape with rounded corners, a subpixel 110b having a substantially triangular top surface shape with rounded corners, and a substantially square or substantially hexagonal top surface shape with rounded corners. and a sub-pixel 110c having Also, the sub-pixel 110a has a larger light emitting area than the sub-pixel 110b.
- the shape and size of each sub-pixel can be determined independently.
- sub-pixels with more reliable light emitting devices can be smaller in size.
- sub-pixel 110a may be a green sub-pixel G
- sub-pixel 110b may be a red sub-pixel R
- sub-pixel 110c may be a blue sub-pixel B, as shown in FIG. 3B.
- FIG. 2C shows an example in which pixels 124a having sub-pixels 110a and 110b and pixels 124b having sub-pixels 110b and 110c are alternately arranged.
- sub-pixel 110a may be red sub-pixel R
- sub-pixel 110b may be green sub-pixel G
- sub-pixel 110c may be blue sub-pixel B, as shown in FIG. 3C.
- Pixel 124a, 124b shown in Figures 2D and 2E have a delta arrangement applied.
- Pixel 124a has two sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a and 110b) in the upper row (first row) and one sub-pixel (sub-pixel 110c) in the lower row (second row).
- Pixel 124b has one sub-pixel (sub-pixel 110c) in the upper row (first row) and two sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a and 110b) in the lower row (second row).
- sub-pixel 110a may be red sub-pixel R
- sub-pixel 110b may be green sub-pixel G
- sub-pixel 110c may be blue sub-pixel B, as shown in FIG. 3D.
- FIG. 2D is an example in which each sub-pixel has a substantially square top surface shape with rounded corners
- FIG. 2E is an example in which each sub-pixel has a circular top surface shape.
- FIG. 2F is an example in which sub-pixels of each color are arranged in a zigzag pattern. Specifically, when viewed from above, the positions of the upper sides of two sub-pixels (for example, sub-pixel 110a and sub-pixel 110b or sub-pixel 110b and sub-pixel 110c) aligned in the column direction are shifted.
- sub-pixel 110a may be red sub-pixel R
- sub-pixel 110b may be green sub-pixel G
- sub-pixel 110c may be blue sub-pixel B, as shown in FIG. 3E.
- the top surface shape of the sub-pixel may be a polygonal shape with rounded corners, an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or the like.
- the EL layer is processed into an island shape using a resist mask.
- the resist film formed on the EL layer needs to be cured at a temperature lower than the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer. Therefore, depending on the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer material and the curing temperature of the resist material, curing of the resist film may be insufficient.
- a resist film that is insufficiently hardened may take a shape away from the desired shape during processing.
- the top surface shape of the EL layer may be a polygon with rounded corners, an ellipse, or a circle. For example, when a resist mask having a square top surface is formed, a resist mask having a circular top surface is formed, and the EL layer may have a circular top surface.
- a technique for correcting the mask pattern in advance so that the design pattern and the transfer pattern match.
- OPC Optical Proximity Correction
- a pattern for correction is added to a corner portion of a figure on a mask pattern.
- pixel 110 to which the stripe arrangement shown in FIG. 1A is applied for example, as shown in FIG. 110c can be a blue sub-pixel B;
- a pixel can have four types of sub-pixels.
- a stripe arrangement is applied to the pixels 110 shown in FIGS. 4A to 4C.
- FIG. 4A is an example in which each sub-pixel has a rectangular top surface shape
- FIG. 4B is an example in which each sub-pixel has a top surface shape connecting two semicircles and a rectangle
- FIG. This is an example where the sub-pixel has an elliptical top surface shape.
- a matrix arrangement is applied to the pixels 110 shown in FIGS. 4D to 4F.
- FIG. 4D is an example in which each sub-pixel has a square top surface shape
- FIG. 4E is an example in which each sub-pixel has a substantially square top surface shape with rounded corners
- FIG. which have a circular top shape.
- FIGS. 4G and 4H show an example in which one pixel 110 is configured in 2 rows and 3 columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 4G has three sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c) in the upper row (first row) and one sub-pixel ( sub-pixel 110d).
- pixel 110 has sub-pixel 110a in the left column (first column), sub-pixel 110b in the middle column (second column), and sub-pixel 110b in the right column (third column). It has pixels 110c and sub-pixels 110d over these three columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 4H has three sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c) in the upper row (first row) and three sub-pixels 110d in the lower row (second row). have In other words, pixel 110 has sub-pixels 110a and 110d in the left column (first column), sub-pixels 110b and 110d in the center column (second column), and sub-pixels 110b and 110d in the middle column (second column).
- a column (third column) has a sub-pixel 110c and a sub-pixel 110d.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 4A-4H is composed of four sub-pixels, sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c and 110d.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c, 110d have light emitting devices that emit different colors of light.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c, and 110d include four sub-pixels of R, G, B, and white (W), sub-pixels of four colors of R, G, B, and Y, or red, green, and blue. , sub-pixels emitting infrared light, and the like.
- subpixels 110a, 110b, 110c, and 110d can be red, green, blue, and white subpixels, respectively.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention may include a light-receiving device in a pixel.
- sub-pixels included in the pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H three may be configured to have light-emitting devices, and the remaining one may be configured to include light-receiving devices.
- a pn-type or pin-type photodiode can be used as the light receiving device.
- a light-receiving device functions as a photoelectric conversion device (also referred to as a photoelectric conversion element) that detects light incident on the light-receiving device and generates an electric charge. The amount of charge generated from the light receiving device is determined based on the amount of light incident on the light receiving device.
- organic photodiode having a layer containing an organic compound as the light receiving device.
- Organic photodiodes can be easily made thinner, lighter, and larger, and have a high degree of freedom in shape and design, so that they can be applied to various display devices.
- an organic EL device is used as the light-emitting device and an organic photodiode is used as the light-receiving device.
- An organic EL device and an organic photodiode can be formed on the same substrate. Therefore, an organic photodiode can be incorporated in a display device using an organic EL device.
- a light receiving device has an active layer that functions at least as a photoelectric conversion layer between a pair of electrodes.
- one of a pair of electrodes may be referred to as a pixel electrode and the other may be referred to as a common electrode.
- sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c may be R, G, and B sub-pixels
- sub-pixel 110d may be a sub-pixel having a light receiving device.
- one electrode functions as an anode and the other electrode functions as a cathode.
- the light-receiving device can be driven by applying a reverse bias between the pixel electrode and the common electrode, thereby detecting light incident on the light-receiving device, generating electric charge, and extracting it as a current.
- the pixel electrode may function as a cathode and the common electrode may function as an anode.
- a manufacturing method similar to that for the light-emitting device can also be applied to the light-receiving device.
- the island-shaped active layer (also called photoelectric conversion layer) of the light receiving device is not formed using a fine metal mask, but is formed by forming a film that will become the active layer over the surface and then processing it. Therefore, the island-shaped active layer can be formed with a uniform thickness. Further, by providing the sacrificial layer over the active layer, the damage to the active layer during the manufacturing process of the display device can be reduced, and the reliability of the light receiving device can be improved.
- a layer shared by the light-receiving device and the light-emitting device may have different functions in the light-emitting device and in the light-receiving device. Components are sometimes referred to herein based on their function in the light emitting device.
- a hole-injecting layer functions as a hole-injecting layer in light-emitting devices and as a hole-transporting layer in light-receiving devices.
- an electron-injecting layer functions as an electron-injecting layer in light-emitting devices and as an electron-transporting layer in light-receiving devices.
- a layer shared by the light-receiving device and the light-emitting device may have the same function in the light-emitting device as in the light-receiving device.
- a hole-transporting layer functions as a hole-transporting layer in both a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device
- an electron-transporting layer functions as an electron-transporting layer in both a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device.
- the active layer of the light receiving device contains a semiconductor.
- the semiconductor include inorganic semiconductors such as silicon and organic semiconductors including organic compounds.
- an organic semiconductor is used as the semiconductor included in the active layer.
- the light-emitting layer and the active layer can be formed by the same method (for example, a vacuum deposition method), and a manufacturing apparatus can be shared, which is preferable.
- Electron-accepting organic semiconductor materials such as fullerenes ( eg, C60 fullerene, C70 fullerene, etc.) and fullerene derivatives can be used as n-type semiconductor materials for the active layer.
- Fullerenes have a soccer ball-like shape, which is energetically stable.
- Fullerene has both deep (low) HOMO and LUMO levels. Since fullerene has a deep LUMO level, it has an extremely high electron-accepting property (acceptor property).
- acceptor property electron-acceptor property
- C60 fullerene and C70 fullerene have a wide absorption band in the visible light region.
- C70 fullerene has a larger ⁇ -electron conjugated system than C60 fullerene and has a wide absorption band in the long wavelength region. preferable.
- [6,6]-Phenyl-C71-butylic acid methyl ester (abbreviation: PC70BM), [6,6]-Phenyl-C61-butylic acid methyl ester (abbreviation: PC60BM), 1′, 1′′,4′,4′′-Tetrahydro-di[1,4]methanonaphthaleno[1,2:2′,3′,56,60:2′′,3′′][5,6]fullerene- C60 (abbreviation: ICBA) etc. are mentioned.
- Materials for the n-type semiconductor include metal complexes having a quinoline skeleton, metal complexes having a benzoquinoline skeleton, metal complexes having an oxazole skeleton, metal complexes having a thiazole skeleton, oxadiazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, Oxazole derivatives, thiazole derivatives, phenanthroline derivatives, quinoline derivatives, benzoquinoline derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, dibenzoquinoxaline derivatives, pyridine derivatives, bipyridine derivatives, pyrimidine derivatives, naphthalene derivatives, anthracene derivatives, coumarin derivatives, rhodamine derivatives, triazine derivatives, quinone derivatives, etc. are mentioned.
- Materials for the p-type semiconductor of the active layer include copper (II) phthalocyanine (CuPc), tetraphenyldibenzoperiflanthene (DBP), zinc phthalocyanine (ZnPc), tin ( II) electron-donating organic semiconductor materials such as phthalocyanine (SnPc) and quinacridone;
- Examples of p-type semiconductor materials include carbazole derivatives, thiophene derivatives, furan derivatives, and compounds having an aromatic amine skeleton.
- materials for p-type semiconductors include naphthalene derivatives, anthracene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, pyrrole derivatives, benzofuran derivatives, benzothiophene derivatives, indole derivatives, dibenzofuran derivatives, dibenzothiophene derivatives, indolocarbazole derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, phthalocyanine derivatives, naphthalocyanine derivatives, quinacridone derivatives, polyphenylenevinylene derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polythiophene derivatives and the like.
- the HOMO level of the electron-donating organic semiconductor material is preferably shallower (higher) than the HOMO level of the electron-accepting organic semiconductor material.
- the LUMO level of the electron-donating organic semiconductor material is preferably shallower (higher) than the LUMO level of the electron-accepting organic semiconductor material.
- a spherical fullerene as the electron-accepting organic semiconductor material and an organic semiconductor material having a nearly planar shape as the electron-donating organic semiconductor material. Molecules with similar shapes tend to gather together, and when molecules of the same type aggregate, the energy levels of the molecular orbitals are close to each other, so the carrier transportability can be enhanced.
- the active layer is preferably formed by co-depositing an n-type semiconductor and a p-type semiconductor.
- the active layer may be formed by laminating an n-type semiconductor and a p-type semiconductor.
- the light-receiving device further includes, as layers other than the active layer, a layer containing a highly hole-transporting substance, a highly electron-transporting substance, a bipolar substance (substances having high electron-transporting and hole-transporting properties), or the like. may have.
- the layer is not limited to the above, and may further include a layer containing a highly hole-injecting substance, a hole-blocking material, a highly electron-injecting substance, an electron-blocking material, or the like.
- Either a low-molecular-weight compound or a high-molecular-weight compound can be used for the light-receiving device, and an inorganic compound may be included.
- the layers constituting the light-receiving device can be formed by methods such as a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, and a coating method.
- hole-transporting materials include polymer compounds such as poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)/poly(styrenesulfonic acid) (PEDOT/PSS), molybdenum oxide, and copper iodide (CuI).
- Inorganic compounds such as can be used.
- an inorganic compound such as zinc oxide (ZnO) can be used as the electron-transporting material.
- 6-diyl]-2,5-thiophenediyl[5,7-bis(2-ethylhexyl)-4,8-dioxo-4H,8H-benzo[1,2-c:4,5-c′]dithiophene-1 ,3-diyl]]polymer (abbreviation: PBDB-T) or a polymer compound such as a PBDB-T derivative can be used.
- a method of dispersing an acceptor material in PBDB-T or a PBDB-T derivative can be used.
- three or more kinds of materials may be mixed in the active layer.
- a third material may be mixed in addition to the n-type semiconductor material and the p-type semiconductor material.
- the third material may be a low-molecular compound or a high-molecular compound.
- a display device including a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device in a pixel
- contact or proximity of an object can be detected while displaying an image.
- some sub-pixels exhibit light as a light source, some other sub-pixels perform light detection, and the remaining sub-pixels You can also display images with
- light-emitting devices are arranged in matrix in the display portion, and an image can be displayed on the display portion.
- light receiving devices are arranged in a matrix in the display section, and the display section has one or both of an imaging function and a sensing function in addition to an image display function.
- the display part can be used for an image sensor or a touch sensor. That is, by detecting light on the display portion, an image can be captured, or proximity or contact of an object (a finger, hand, pen, or the like) can be detected.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can use a light-emitting device as a light source of a sensor. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a light receiving portion and a light source separately from the display device, and the number of parts of the electronic device can be reduced.
- the light-receiving device when an object reflects (or scatters) light emitted by a light-emitting device included in the display portion, the light-receiving device can detect the reflected light (or scattered light).
- the reflected light or scattered light.
- imaging or touch detection is possible.
- the display device can capture an image using the light receiving device.
- the display device of this embodiment can be used as a scanner.
- an image sensor can be used to acquire biometric data such as fingerprints and palm prints. That is, the biometric authentication sensor can be incorporated in the display device.
- the biometric authentication sensor can be incorporated into the display device.
- the display device can detect proximity or contact of an object using the light receiving device.
- the pixels shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B have sub-pixels G, sub-pixels B, sub-pixels R, and sub-pixels PS.
- a stripe arrangement is applied to the pixels shown in FIG. 6A.
- a matrix arrangement is applied to the pixels shown in FIG. 6B.
- the pixels shown in FIGS. 6C and 6D have sub-pixel G, sub-pixel B, sub-pixel R, sub-pixel PS, and sub-pixel IRS.
- FIG. 6C and 6D show examples in which one pixel is provided over two rows and three columns.
- Three sub-pixels (sub-pixel G, sub-pixel B, and sub-pixel R) are provided in the upper row (first row).
- three sub-pixels (one sub-pixel PS and two sub-pixels IRS) are provided in the lower row (second row).
- two sub-pixels are provided in the lower row (second row).
- FIG. 6C by aligning the arrangement of the sub-pixels in the upper row and the lower row, it is possible to efficiently remove dust that may be generated in the manufacturing process. Therefore, a display device with high display quality can be provided.
- the layout of sub-pixels is not limited to the configurations shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D.
- Sub-pixel R has a light-emitting device that emits red light.
- Sub-pixel G has a light-emitting device that emits green light.
- Sub-pixel B has a light-emitting device that emits blue light.
- the sub-pixels PS and sub-pixels IRS each have a light receiving device.
- the wavelength of light detected by the sub-pixels PS and IRS is not particularly limited.
- the two sub-pixels IRS may each have their own light receiving device, or may have one light receiving device in common. That is, the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 6C can be configured to have one light receiving device for the subpixel PS and one or two light receiving devices for the subpixel IRS.
- the light receiving area of the sub-pixel PS is smaller than the light receiving area of the sub-pixel IRS.
- the sub-pixels PS can be used to capture images for personal authentication using a fingerprint, palm print, iris, pulse shape (including vein shape and artery shape), face, or the like.
- the light-receiving device included in the subpixel PS preferably detects visible light, and preferably detects one or more of blue, purple, blue-violet, green, yellow-green, yellow, orange, and red light. . Also, the light receiving device included in the sub-pixel PS may detect infrared light.
- the sub-pixel IRS can be used for a touch sensor (also called a direct touch sensor) or a near-touch sensor (also called a hover sensor, a hover touch sensor, a non-contact sensor, or a touchless sensor).
- the sub-pixel IRS can appropriately determine the wavelength of light to be detected according to the application.
- sub-pixel IRS preferably detects infrared light. This enables touch detection even in dark places.
- a touch sensor or near-touch sensor can detect the proximity or contact of an object (such as a finger, hand, or pen).
- a touch sensor can detect an object by direct contact between the display device and the object. Also, the near-touch sensor can detect the object even if the object does not touch the display device. For example, it is preferable that the display device can detect the object when the distance between the display device and the object is 0.1 mm or more and 300 mm or less, preferably 3 mm or more and 50 mm or less. With this structure, the display device can be operated without direct contact with the object, in other words, the display device can be operated without contact. With the above configuration, the risk of staining or scratching the display device can be reduced, or the object can be displayed without directly touching the stain (for example, dust or virus) attached to the display device. It becomes possible to operate the device.
- the stain for example, dust or virus
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have a variable refresh rate.
- the power consumption can be reduced by adjusting the refresh rate (for example, in the range of 1 Hz to 240 Hz) according to the content displayed on the display device.
- the drive frequency of the touch sensor or the near-touch sensor may be changed according to the refresh rate. For example, when the refresh rate of the display device is 120 Hz, the driving frequency of the touch sensor or the near-touch sensor can be higher than 120 Hz (typically 240 Hz). With this structure, low power consumption can be achieved and the response speed of the touch sensor or the near touch sensor can be increased.
- the display device 100 shown in FIGS. 6E to 6G has, between substrates 351 and 359, a layer 353 having light receiving devices, a functional layer 355, and a layer 357 having light emitting devices.
- the functional layer 355 has circuitry for driving the light receiving device and circuitry for driving the light emitting device.
- the functional layer 355 can be provided with switches, transistors, capacitors, resistors, wirings, terminals, and the like. Note that in the case of driving the light-emitting device and the light-receiving device by a passive matrix method, a structure in which the switch and the transistor are not provided may be employed.
- a finger 352 touching the display device 100 reflects light emitted by a light-emitting device in a layer 357 having a light-emitting device, so that a light-receiving device in a layer 353 having a light-receiving device reflects the light.
- Detect light Thereby, it is possible to detect that the finger 352 touches the display device 100 .
- FIGS. 6F and 6G it may have a function of detecting or imaging an object that is close to (not in contact with) the display device.
- FIG. 6F shows an example of detecting a human finger
- FIG. 6G shows an example of detecting information around, on the surface of, or inside the human eye (number of blinks, eyeball movement, eyelid movement, etc.).
- the sub-pixels PS are provided in all the pixels included in the display device.
- the sub-pixel IRS used for a touch sensor or a near-touch sensor does not require high precision compared to detection using the sub-pixel PS, so it is sufficient if it is provided in some pixels of the display device. .
- the detection speed can be increased.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have two functions in addition to the display function by mounting two types of light-receiving devices in one pixel. Multi-functionalization is possible. For example, it is possible to realize a high-definition imaging function and a sensing function such as a touch sensor or a near-touch sensor. In addition, by combining a pixel equipped with two types of light receiving devices and a pixel with another configuration, the functions of the display device can be further increased. For example, a light-emitting device that emits infrared light, or a pixel having various sensor devices can be used.
- FIGS. 7A to 7F are top views showing the manufacturing method of the display device.
- 8A to 8C show side by side a cross-sectional view taken along dashed line X1-X2 in FIG. 1A and a cross-sectional view taken along Y1-Y2.
- 9 to 14 are the same as FIG. 8.
- FIG. 8A to 8C show side by side a cross-sectional view taken along dashed line X1-X2 in FIG. 1A and a cross-sectional view taken along Y1-Y2.
- the thin films (insulating films, semiconductor films, conductive films, etc.) that make up the display device are formed using the sputtering method, CVD method, vacuum deposition method, pulsed laser deposition (PLD) method, ALD method, etc. can do.
- CVD methods include PECVD and thermal CVD.
- one of the thermal CVD methods is the metal organic CVD (MOCVD) method.
- the thin films (insulating film, semiconductor film, conductive film, etc.) that make up the display device can be applied by spin coating, dipping, spray coating, inkjet, dispensing, screen printing, offset printing, doctor knife, slit coating, roll coating, It can be formed by methods such as curtain coating and knife coating.
- a vacuum process such as a vapor deposition method and a solution process such as a spin coating method or an inkjet method can be used for manufacturing a light-emitting device.
- vapor deposition methods include physical vapor deposition (PVD) such as sputtering, ion plating, ion beam vapor deposition, molecular beam vapor deposition, and vacuum vapor deposition, and chemical vapor deposition (CVD).
- the functional layers (hole injection layer, hole transport layer, light emitting layer, electron transport layer, electron injection layer, etc.) included in the EL layer may be formed by a vapor deposition method (vacuum vapor deposition method, etc.), a coating method (dip coating method, die coat method, bar coat method, spin coat method, spray coat method, etc.), printing method (inkjet method, screen (stencil printing) method, offset (lithographic printing) method, flexographic (letterpress printing) method, gravure method, or micro contact method, etc.).
- a vapor deposition method vacuum vapor deposition method, etc.
- a coating method dip coating method, die coat method, bar coat method, spin coat method, spray coat method, etc.
- printing method inkjet method, screen (stencil printing) method, offset (lithographic printing) method, flexographic (letterpress printing) method, gravure method, or micro contact method, etc.
- a photolithography method or the like can be used when processing a thin film forming a display device.
- the thin film may be processed by a nanoimprint method, a sandblast method, a lift-off method, or the like.
- an island-shaped thin film may be directly formed by a film formation method using a shielding mask such as a metal mask.
- the photolithography method there are typically the following two methods.
- One is a method of forming a resist mask on a thin film to be processed, processing the thin film by etching or the like, and removing the resist mask.
- the other is a method of forming a photosensitive thin film, then performing exposure and development to process the thin film into a desired shape.
- the light used for exposure can be, for example, i-line (wavelength 365 nm), g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), or a mixture thereof.
- ultraviolet rays, KrF laser light, ArF laser light, or the like can also be used.
- extreme ultraviolet (EUV: Extreme Ultra-violet) light or X-rays may be used.
- An electron beam can also be used instead of the light used for exposure. The use of extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, or electron beams is preferable because extremely fine processing is possible.
- a photomask is not necessary when exposure is performed by scanning a beam such as an electron beam.
- a dry etching method, a wet etching method, a sandblasting method, or the like can be used for etching the thin film.
- conductive layers 111a, 111b, 111c, and 123a are formed over the layer 101 including transistors. Then, a layer 128 is formed so as to fill the concave portions of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c. Then, a conductive layer 112a is formed over the conductive layer 111a and the layer 128, a conductive layer 112b is formed over the conductive layer 111b and the layer 128, a conductive layer 112c is formed over the conductive layer 111c and the layer 128, and a conductive layer 123b is formed over the conductive layer 123a. Form.
- a conductive layer 126a is formed over the conductive layer 112a
- a conductive layer 126b is formed over the conductive layer 112b
- a conductive layer 126c is formed over the conductive layer 112c.
- a conductive film 129z is formed over the layer 101 including the transistor and over the conductive layers 126a, 126b, 126c, and 123b.
- the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c are preferably provided so as to cover side surfaces of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c, respectively.
- the ends of the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c are preferably located outside the ends of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c.
- the ends of the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c may coincide with the ends of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c.
- it may be located inside the end portions of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c.
- the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c are preferably provided so as to cover side surfaces of the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c, respectively.
- the ends of the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c are preferably located outside the ends of the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c.
- the ends of the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c may coincide with the ends of the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c.
- they may be located inside the ends of the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c.
- the conductive film 129 is preferably provided so as to cover top surfaces and side surfaces of the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c.
- conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 126a are mainly described below as an example, the same applies to the conductive layers 111b, 112b, and 126b, and the conductive layers 111c, 112c, and 126c.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- at least two of the films to be the conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 126a may be processed in the same step or processed using the same mask pattern. This is preferable because it is possible to reduce the number of steps or the number of masks.
- layers formed in the same step or by processing using the same mask pattern have aligned or substantially aligned ends.
- top surface shapes of at least two of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 126a may match or substantially match.
- the conductive film 129 is a conductive film to be processed in a later step.
- a conductive film to be processed in a later step an example in which three conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 126a are formed first and then the conductive film 129 is processed is shown.
- the conductive film processed in a later step may have two or more layers.
- connection portion 140 a conductive layer formed using the same material and in the same process as at least one of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 126a can be provided.
- a conductive layer formed by processing the conductive film 129 may be provided.
- This embodiment mode shows an example in which the conductive layers 123a and 123b provided in the connection portion 140 are formed using the same material and in the same process as the conductive layers 111a and 112a.
- the conductive layer provided in the connection portion 140 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure.
- a first layer 113A is formed over the conductive film 129, a first sacrificial layer 118A is formed over the first layer 113A, and a second sacrificial layer 119A is formed over the first sacrificial layer 118A. do.
- the end portion of the first layer 113A on the connection portion 140 side is located inside (on the display portion side) the end portion of the first sacrificial layer 118A. do.
- a mask for defining a film formation area also referred to as an area mask or a rough metal mask to distinguish it from a fine metal mask
- the first layer 113A, the first sacrificial layer 118A, and the first layer 118A can be formed. 2 of the sacrificial layer 119A can be changed.
- a light-emitting device is formed using a resist mask. By combining with an area mask as described above, a light-emitting device can be manufactured through a relatively simple process.
- the above structure applicable to the pixel electrode can be applied.
- a sputtering method or a vacuum evaporation method can be used for forming the conductive layers 111a, 112a, and 126a and the conductive film 129, for example.
- the first layer 113A is a layer that later becomes the first layer 113a. Therefore, the above-described structure applicable to the first layer 113a can be applied.
- the first layer 113A can be formed by a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, or the like.
- the first layer 113A is preferably formed using an evaporation method.
- a premixed material may be used in deposition using a vapor deposition method. In this specification and the like, a premix material is a composite material in which a plurality of materials are blended or mixed in advance.
- the first layer 113A and the second layer 113B and the third layer 113C formed in later steps are films having high resistance to processing conditions. Specifically, a film having a high etching selectivity with respect to various EL layers is used.
- Sputtering can be used to form the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A, for example.
- the first sacrificial layer 118A formed on and in contact with the EL layer is preferably formed using a formation method that causes less damage to the EL layer than the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A are formed at a temperature lower than the heat-resistant temperature of the EL layer (typically, 200° C. or lower, preferably 100° C. or lower, more preferably 80° C. or lower). Form.
- a film that can be removed by a wet etching method is preferably used for the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- damage to the first layer 113A during processing of the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A can be reduced as compared with the case of using the dry etching method.
- a film having a high etching selectivity with respect to the second sacrificial layer 119A is preferably used for the first sacrificial layer 118A.
- each layer constituting the EL layer (a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, an electron transport layer, etc.) is difficult to process.
- various sacrificial layers are difficult to process in the process of processing each layer constituting the EL layer. It is desirable to select the material of the sacrificial layer, the processing method, and the processing method of the EL layer in consideration of these factors.
- the sacrificial layer is formed to have a two-layer structure of the first sacrificial layer and the second sacrificial layer is shown; It may have a laminated structure.
- an inorganic film such as a metal film, an alloy film, a metal oxide film, a semiconductor film, or an inorganic insulating film can be used.
- first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A for example, gold, silver, platinum, magnesium, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, palladium, titanium, aluminum, yttrium, zirconium, and A metallic material such as tantalum or an alloy material containing the metallic material can be used. In particular, it is preferable to use a low melting point material such as aluminum or silver.
- a metal material capable of blocking ultraviolet light for one or both of the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A, irradiation of the EL layer with ultraviolet light can be suppressed. It is preferable because it can suppress the deterioration of
- a metal oxide such as an In--Ga--Zn oxide can be used for the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- an In--Ga--Zn oxide film can be formed using a sputtering method.
- indium oxide, In-Zn oxide, In-Sn oxide, indium titanium oxide (In-Ti oxide), indium tin zinc oxide (In-Sn-Zn oxide), indium titanium zinc oxide ( In--Ti--Zn oxide), indium gallium tin-zinc oxide (In--Ga--Sn--Zn oxide), or the like can be used.
- indium tin oxide containing silicon or the like can be used.
- element M is aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten , or one or more selected from magnesium
- M is aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten , or one or more selected from magnesium
- first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A various inorganic insulating films that can be used for the protective layer 131 can be used.
- an oxide insulating film is preferable because it has higher adhesion to the EL layer than a nitride insulating film.
- an inorganic insulating material such as aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, or silicon oxide can be used for the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- an aluminum oxide film can be formed using the ALD method. Use of the ALD method is preferable because damage to the base (especially the EL layer or the like) can be reduced.
- an inorganic insulating film e.g., aluminum oxide film
- an In--Ga--Zn film formed using a sputtering method is used as the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- An oxide film can be used.
- an inorganic insulating film (eg, aluminum oxide film) formed by ALD is used as the first sacrificial layer 118A, and an aluminum film or a tungsten film formed by sputtering is used as the second sacrificial layer 119A. can be used.
- a material that can be dissolved in a chemically stable solvent may be used at least for the film positioned on the top of the first layer 113A.
- a material that dissolves in water or alcohol can be suitably used for the first sacrificial layer 118A or the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A are formed by spin coating, dip coating, spray coating, inkjet, dispensing, screen printing, offset printing, doctor knife method, slit coating, roll coating, curtain coating, knife coating, and the like. It may be formed using a wet film formation method.
- Polyvinyl alcohol PVA
- polyvinyl butyral polyvinylpyrrolidone
- polyethylene glycol polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- polyglycerin polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- water-soluble cellulose polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- water-soluble cellulose polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- water-soluble cellulose water-soluble cellulose
- alcohol-soluble polyamide resin or the like.
- Organic materials may also be used.
- a resist mask 190a is formed on the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- a resist mask can be formed by applying a photosensitive resin (photoresist), followed by exposure and development.
- the resist mask may be manufactured using either a positive resist material or a negative resist material.
- the resist mask 190a is provided at a position overlapping with a region that will later become the sub-pixel 110a. As shown in FIG. 7A, it is preferable that one island pattern is provided as a resist mask 190a for one sub-pixel 110a. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 7D, as a resist mask 190a, one belt-like pattern may be formed for a plurality of sub-pixels 110a arranged in a row (in the Y direction in FIG. 7D).
- the resist mask 190a it is preferable to form the resist mask 190a so that an end portion of the resist mask 190a is located outside an end portion of the conductive layer 126a. Accordingly, the end portion of the first layer 113a and the end portion of the conductive layer 129a which are formed later can be provided outside the end portion of the conductive layer 126a.
- the resist mask 190 a may also be provided at a position overlapping with the connection portion 140 .
- part of the second sacrificial layer 119A is removed to form a sacrificial layer 119a.
- the sacrificial layer 119a remains in the region that will become the sub-pixel 110a later and the region that will become the connection portion 140 later.
- etching the second sacrificial layer 119A it is preferable to use etching conditions with a high selectivity so that the first sacrificial layer 118A is not removed by the etching.
- the EL layer is not exposed in the processing of the second sacrificial layer 119A, there is a wider selection of processing methods than in the processing of the first sacrificial layer 118A. Specifically, deterioration of the EL layer can be further suppressed even when a gas containing oxygen is used as an etching gas in processing the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- the resist mask 190a is removed.
- the resist mask 190a can be removed by ashing using oxygen plasma.
- an oxygen gas and a noble gas such as CF 4 , C 4 F 8 , SF 6 , CHF 3 , Cl 2 , H 2 O, BCl 3 , or He may be used.
- the resist mask 190a may be removed by wet etching.
- the first sacrificial layer 118A is located on the outermost surface and the first layer 113A is not exposed, it is possible to suppress damage to the first layer 113A in the step of removing the resist mask 190a. can be done.
- part of the first sacrificial layer 118A is removed to form a sacrificial layer 118a.
- the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A can be processed by wet etching or dry etching, respectively.
- the first sacrificial layer 118A and the second sacrificial layer 119A are preferably processed by anisotropic etching.
- TMAH aqueous tetramethylammonium hydroxide
- deterioration of the first layer 113A can be suppressed by not using an oxygen-containing gas as an etching gas.
- a gas containing a noble gas such as CF 4 , C 4 F 8 , SF 6 , CHF 3 , Cl 2 , H 2 O, BCl 3 , or He is used for etching. Gases are preferred.
- the first sacrificial layer 118A can be processed by dry etching using CHF 3 and He.
- the second sacrificial layer 119A is processed by a wet etching method using diluted phosphoric acid. can be done. Alternatively, it may be processed by a dry etching method using CH 4 and Ar. Alternatively, the second sacrificial layer 119A can be processed by a wet etching method using diluted phosphoric acid.
- CF 4 and O 2 or CF 4 and Cl 2 and O 2 are used to dry-etch the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- the sacrificial layer 119A can be processed.
- the sacrificial layers 119a and 118a are used as hard masks to partially remove the first layer 113A to form the first layer 113a.
- the laminated structure of the conductive film 129, the first layer 113a, the sacrificial layer 118a, and the sacrificial layer 119a remains on the conductive layer 126a.
- a laminated structure of the sacrificial layer 118a and the sacrificial layer 119a remains over the conductive layer 123b.
- the end of the first layer 113a is located outside the end of the conductive layer 126a. With such a structure, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased.
- the conductive film 129 has not yet been processed.
- the following steps can be performed without exposing these conductive layers. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress corrosion of these conductive layers in an etching process or the like.
- the conductive film 129 is preferably formed using a material that is less likely to be damaged in an etching step or the like and less likely to be corroded.
- the yield of the light-emitting device can be improved, and the display quality of the light-emitting device can be improved.
- regions of the first layer 113A, the first sacrificial layer 118A, and the second sacrificial layer 119A that do not overlap with the resist mask 190a can be removed.
- part of the first layer 113A may be removed using the resist mask 190a. After that, the resist mask 190a may be removed.
- the processing of the first layer 113A is preferably performed by anisotropic etching.
- Anisotropic dry etching is particularly preferred.
- wet etching may be used.
- deterioration of the first layer 113A can be suppressed by not using an oxygen-containing gas as an etching gas.
- a gas containing oxygen may be used as the etching gas.
- the etching gas contains oxygen, the etching speed can be increased. Therefore, etching can be performed under low power conditions while maintaining a sufficiently high etching rate. Therefore, damage to the first layer 113A can be suppressed. Furthermore, problems such as adhesion of reaction products that occur during etching can be suppressed.
- a dry etching method for example, H 2 , CF 4 , C 4 F 8 , SF 6 , CHF 3 , Cl 2 , H 2 O, BCl 3 , or noble gases such as He and Ar (also referred to as noble gases) It is preferable to use a gas containing one or more of these as the etching gas.
- a gas containing one or more of these and oxygen is preferably used as an etching gas.
- oxygen gas may be used as the etching gas.
- a gas containing H 2 and Ar or a gas containing CF 4 and He can be used as the etching gas.
- a gas containing CF 4 , He, and oxygen can be used as the etching gas.
- a second layer 113B is formed over the sacrificial layer 119a and the conductive film 129, a first sacrificial layer 118B is formed over the second layer 113B, and a first sacrificial layer 118B is formed over the second layer 113B.
- a second sacrificial layer 119B is formed on the sacrificial layer 118B.
- the end portion of the second layer 113B on the connection portion 140 side is located inside (the display portion side) the end portion of the first sacrificial layer 118B. do.
- the second layer 113B is a layer that later becomes the second layer 113b.
- the second layer 113b emits light of a different color than the first layer 113a.
- the structure, materials, and the like that can be applied to the second layer 113b are the same as those of the first layer 113a.
- the second layer 113B can be deposited using a method similar to that of the first layer 113A.
- the first sacrificial layer 118B can be formed using a material applicable to the first sacrificial layer 118A.
- the second sacrificial layer 119B can be formed using a material applicable to the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- a resist mask 190b is formed on the second sacrificial layer 119B.
- the resist mask 190b is provided at a position overlapping with a region that will later become the sub-pixel 110b. As shown in FIG. 7B, it is preferable that one island pattern is provided as a resist mask 190b for one sub-pixel 110b. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 7E, as a resist mask 190b, one belt-like pattern may be formed for a plurality of sub-pixels 110b arranged in a line.
- the resist mask 190b it is preferable to form the resist mask 190b so that an end portion of the resist mask 190b is located outside an end portion of the conductive layer 126b. Accordingly, the end portion of the second layer 113b to be formed later can be provided outside the end portion of the conductive layer 126b.
- the resist mask 190b may also be provided at a position that overlaps with a region that becomes the connection portion 140 later.
- a resist mask 190b is used to partially remove the second sacrificial layer 119B to form a sacrificial layer 119b.
- the sacrificial layer 119b remains in a region that will later become the sub-pixel 110b.
- the resist mask 190b is removed. Then, using the sacrificial layer 119b as a hard mask, part of the first sacrificial layer 118B is removed to form a sacrificial layer 118b.
- the sacrificial layers 119b and 118b are used as hard masks to partially remove the second layer 113B to form the second layer 113b.
- the laminated structure of the conductive film 129, the second layer 113b, the sacrificial layer 118b, and the sacrificial layer 119b remains on the conductive layer 126b.
- a laminated structure of the sacrificial layer 118a and the sacrificial layer 119a remains over the conductive layer 123b.
- the end of the second layer 113b is located outside the end of the conductive layer 126b. With such a structure, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased.
- regions of the second layer 113B, the first sacrificial layer 118B, and the second sacrificial layer 119B that do not overlap with the resist mask 190b can be removed.
- a method applicable to processing the first layer 113A, the first sacrificial layer 118A, and the second sacrificial layer 119A can be used.
- a third layer 113C is formed on the sacrificial layer 119a, the sacrificial layer 119b, and the conductive film 129, and a first sacrificial layer 118C is formed on the third layer 113C. Then, a second sacrificial layer 119C is formed on the first sacrificial layer 118C.
- the end portion of the third layer 113C on the connection portion 140 side is located inside (the display portion side) the end portion of the first sacrificial layer 118C. do.
- the third layer 113C is a layer that later becomes the third layer 113c.
- the third layer 113c emits a different color of light than the first layer 113a and the second layer 113b.
- the structure, materials, and the like that can be applied to the third layer 113c are the same as those of the first layer 113a.
- the third layer 113C can be deposited using a method similar to that of the first layer 113A.
- the first sacrificial layer 118C can be formed using a material applicable to the first sacrificial layer 118A.
- the second sacrificial layer 119C can be formed using a material applicable to the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- a resist mask 190c is formed on the second sacrificial layer 119C.
- the resist mask 190c is provided at a position overlapping with a region that will later become the sub-pixel 110c. As shown in FIG. 7C, it is preferable that one island pattern is provided as a resist mask 190c for one sub-pixel 110c. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 7F, as a resist mask 190c, one belt-like pattern may be formed for a plurality of sub-pixels 110c arranged in a line.
- the resist mask 190c it is preferable to form the resist mask 190c so that an end portion of the resist mask 190c is located outside an end portion of the conductive layer 126c. Accordingly, the end portion of the third layer 113c to be formed later can be provided outside the end portion of the conductive layer 126c.
- the resist mask 190c may also be provided at a position that overlaps with a region that becomes the connection portion 140 later.
- a resist mask 190c is used to partially remove the second sacrificial layer 119C to form a sacrificial layer 119c.
- the sacrificial layer 119c remains in a region that will later become the sub-pixel 110c.
- the resist mask 190c is removed. Then, using the sacrificial layer 119c as a hard mask, part of the first sacrificial layer 118C is removed to form a sacrificial layer 118c.
- the sacrificial layers 119c and 118c are used as hard masks to partially remove the third layer 113C to form the third layer 113c.
- the laminated structure of the conductive film 129, the third layer 113c, the sacrificial layer 118c, and the sacrificial layer 119c remains on the conductive layer 126c.
- a laminated structure of the sacrificial layer 118a and the sacrificial layer 119a remains over the conductive layer 123b.
- the end of the third layer 113c is positioned outside the end of the conductive layer 126c. With such a structure, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased.
- regions of the third layer 113C, the first sacrificial layer 118C, and the second sacrificial layer 119C that do not overlap with the resist mask 190c can be removed.
- a method applicable to processing the first layer 113A, the first sacrificial layer 118A, and the second sacrificial layer 119A can be used.
- the side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are preferably perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the formation surface.
- the angle formed by the surface to be formed and these side surfaces be 60 degrees or more and 90 degrees or less.
- the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c and the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c are used as hard masks to process the conductive film 129, thereby forming conductive layers 129a, 129b, 129c, and 123c. to form
- the conductive film 129 can be processed by a wet etching method or a dry etching method.
- the conductive film 129 is preferably processed by anisotropic etching.
- the conductive film 129 is processed using the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c and the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c as masks. Therefore, the first layer 113a and the conductive layer 129a have the same or substantially the same top surface shape. Similarly, the top surface shapes of the second layer 113b and the conductive layer 129b are the same or substantially the same, and the top shapes of the third layer 113c and the conductive layer 129c are the same or substantially the same. That is, the end of the first layer 113a and the end of the conductive layer 129a are aligned or substantially aligned. Similarly, the edge of the second layer 113b and the edge of the conductive layer 129b are aligned or substantially aligned. The edge of the third layer 113c and the edge of the conductive layer 129c are aligned or substantially aligned.
- sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c are removed. Accordingly, the sacrificial layer 118a is exposed on the conductive layer 111a, the sacrificial layer 118b is exposed on the conductive layer 111b, the sacrificial layer 118c is exposed on the conductive layer 111c, and the sacrificial layer 118a is exposed on the conductive layer 123c. is exposed.
- the step of forming the insulating film 125A may be performed without removing the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c.
- the same method as in the sacrificial layer processing step can be used.
- the wet etching method the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are less damaged when removing the sacrificial layer than when the dry etching method is used. can be reduced.
- the sacrificial layer may be removed by dissolving it in a solvent such as water or alcohol.
- Alcohols include ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol (IPA), glycerin, and the like.
- drying treatment may be performed in order to remove water contained in the EL layer and water adsorbed to the surface of the EL layer.
- heat treatment can be performed in an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced pressure atmosphere.
- the heat treatment can be performed at a substrate temperature of 50° C. to 200° C., preferably 60° C. to 150° C., more preferably 70° C. to 120° C.
- a reduced-pressure atmosphere is preferable because drying can be performed at a lower temperature.
- An insulating film 125A is formed.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, or a nitride oxide insulating film can be used.
- oxide insulating films include silicon oxide films, aluminum oxide films, magnesium oxide films, gallium oxide films, germanium oxide films, yttrium oxide films, zirconium oxide films, lanthanum oxide films, neodymium oxide films, hafnium oxide films, and tantalum oxide films.
- the nitride insulating film include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film.
- a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, or the like can be given.
- nitride oxide insulating film a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, or the like can be given.
- a metal oxide film such as an indium gallium zinc oxide film may be used.
- the insulating film 125A preferably has a function as a barrier insulating film against at least one of water and oxygen.
- the insulating film 125A preferably has a function of suppressing diffusion of at least one of water and oxygen.
- the insulating film 125A preferably has a function of capturing or fixing at least one of water and oxygen (also referred to as gettering).
- a barrier insulating film means an insulating film having a barrier property.
- the term "barrier property" refers to a function of suppressing diffusion of a corresponding substance (also referred to as low permeability).
- the corresponding substance has a function of capturing or fixing (also called gettering).
- the insulating film 125A has the barrier insulating film function or the gettering function described above, so that it is possible to suppress the intrusion of impurities (typically, water or oxygen) that can diffuse into each light-emitting device from the outside. configuration. With such a structure, a highly reliable display device can be provided.
- impurities typically, water or oxygen
- an insulating layer 127 is formed on the insulating film 125A.
- An organic material can be used for the insulating layer 127 .
- organic materials include acrylic resins, polyimide resins, epoxy resins, imide resins, polyamide resins, polyimideamide resins, silicone resins, siloxane resins, benzocyclobutene resins, phenolic resins, and precursors of these resins. be done.
- an organic material such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin may be used.
- a photosensitive resin can be used for the insulating layer 127 .
- a photoresist may be used as the photosensitive resin.
- a positive material or a negative material can be used for the photosensitive resin.
- the insulating layer 127 can be patterned by, for example, applying a photosensitive resin and performing exposure and development.
- Etching may be performed to adjust the height of the surface of the insulating layer 127 .
- the insulating layer 127 may be processed, for example, by ashing using oxygen plasma.
- the method of forming the film that serves as the insulating layer 127 includes spin coating, dipping, spray coating, inkjet, dispensing, screen printing, offset printing, doctor knife method, slit coating, roll coating, curtain coating, and knife coating. It can be formed using a wet film formation method such as. In particular, it is preferable to form a film to be the insulating layer 127 by spin coating.
- the insulating film 125A and the insulating layer 127 are preferably formed by a formation method that causes less damage to the EL layer.
- the insulating film 125A is formed in contact with the side surface of the EL layer, it is preferably formed by a formation method that causes less damage to the EL layer than the insulating layer 127.
- the insulating film 125A and the insulating layer 127 are each formed at a temperature lower than the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer (typically, 200° C. or lower, preferably 100° C. or lower, more preferably 80° C. or lower).
- an aluminum oxide film can be formed using an ALD method. The use of the ALD method is preferable because film formation damage can be reduced and a film with high coverage can be formed.
- the insulating film 125A and at least part of the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c are removed, and the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are formed. expose the
- the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, 118c and the insulating film 125A may be removed in separate steps or may be removed in the same step.
- the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, 118c and the insulating film 125A are films formed using the same material, they can be removed in the same process, which is preferable.
- both the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c and the insulating film 125A are preferably formed by using an ALD method, and more preferably by using an ALD method to form an aluminum oxide film.
- a region of the insulating film 125A that overlaps with the insulating layer 127 remains as the insulating layer 125.
- regions of the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c that overlap with the insulating layer 127 remain.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have a structure in which the sacrificial layer remains. Note that all of the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c may be removed depending on the shape of the insulating layer 127. FIG. Therefore, the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, 118c may not remain in the display.
- the insulating layer 125 (furthermore, the insulating layer 127) is provided to cover side surfaces of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- films formed later can be prevented from coming into contact with the side surfaces of these layers, and short-circuiting of the light-emitting device can be prevented.
- damage to the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c in a later step can be suppressed.
- the same method as in the sacrificial layer processing step can be used.
- the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c can be formed by the same method as the method that can be used in the step of removing the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c.
- the insulating film 125A is preferably processed by a dry etching method.
- the insulating film 125A is preferably processed by anisotropic etching.
- the insulating film 125A can be processed using an etching gas that can be used for processing the sacrificial layer.
- a fourth layer 114 is formed to cover the insulating layer 125, the insulating layer 127, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. .
- connection portion 140 is provided with the fourth layer 114 .
- the connection portion 140 may be provided with the fourth layer 114 depending on the conductivity of the fourth layer 114 .
- the end of the fourth layer 114 on the side of the connecting portion 140 be located inside (toward the display portion) the connecting portion 140 .
- the fourth layer 114 can be formed by a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, or the like. Also, the fourth layer 114 may be formed using a premixed material.
- the fourth layer 114 is provided so as to cover the upper surfaces of the first layer 113 a , the second layer 113 b , and the third layer 113 c and the upper surface and side surfaces of the insulating layer 127 .
- any side surface of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c 4 layer 114 may short the light emitting device.
- the insulating layers 125 and 127 cover side surfaces of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. Therefore, contact of the fourth layer 114 with high conductivity with these layers can be suppressed, and short-circuiting of the light-emitting device can be suppressed. This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device.
- the fourth layer 114 Since the spaces between the first layer 113a and the second layer 113b and between the second layer 113b and the third layer 113c are filled with the insulating layers 125 and 127, the fourth layer 114 The surface on which the insulating layers 125 and 127 are formed is flat with a smaller step than when the insulating layers 125 and 127 are not provided. Thereby, the coverage of the fourth layer 114 can be improved.
- the common electrode 115 is formed over the fourth layer 114 (and over the conductive layer 123c).
- conductive layer 123c and common electrode 115 are electrically connected through fourth layer 114.
- the conductive layer 123c and the common electrode 115 are electrically connected by being in direct contact with each other.
- a mask may be used to define the film forming area.
- the common electrode 115 may be processed using a resist mask or the like after the common electrode 115 is formed without using the mask for forming the common electrode 115 .
- common electrode 115 Materials that can be used for the common electrode 115 are as described above.
- a sputtering method or a vacuum deposition method can be used.
- a film formed by an evaporation method and a film formed by a sputtering method may be stacked.
- a protective layer 131 is formed over the common electrode 115 . Furthermore, by bonding the substrate 120 onto the protective layer 131 using the resin layer 122, the display device 100 shown in FIG. 1B can be manufactured.
- the material and deposition method that can be used for the protective layer 131 are as described above.
- Methods for forming the protective layer 131 include a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, a CVD method, an ALD method, and the like.
- the protective layer 131 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure.
- the shape of the insulating layer 127 is not particularly limited. 13A to 13C and 14A show modifications of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 12B. Specifically, these modifications differ in the shape of the insulating layer 127 .
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 can be configured to have a shape in which the center and its vicinity are depressed in a cross-sectional view, that is, a shape having a concave curved surface.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 can be configured to have a shape in which the center and the vicinity thereof bulge in a cross-sectional view, that is, have a convex curved surface.
- the insulating layer 127 may have a flat portion on the upper surface in a cross-sectional view.
- top surfaces of the insulating layers 125 and 127 are lower than the top surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- the top surface of the insulating layer 127 may be higher than the top surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- At least one of the heights of the top surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c and the heights of the top surfaces of the insulating layers 125 and 127 are the same or approximately the same. may match.
- the layers formed over the insulating layer 127, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c can be formed flatter, and the coverage of the layers can be further improved. be able to.
- At least one of the heights of the top surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c and the height of the top surface of the insulating layer 125 are the same or approximately the same. They may coincide and the top surface of the insulating layer 127 may have a concave surface. Alternatively, the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 may have a convex curved surface.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 may have one or both of a convex curved surface and a concave curved surface. Further, the number of convex curved surfaces and concave curved surfaces of the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 is not limited, and may be one or more.
- the height of the top surface of the insulating layer 125 and the height of the top surface of the insulating layer 127 may be the same or substantially the same, or may be different from each other.
- the height of the top surface of the insulating layer 125 may be lower or higher than the height of the top surface of the insulating layer 127 .
- the heights of the upper surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c may be different.
- the height of the top surface of the insulating layer 125 matches or substantially matches the height of the top surface of the first layer 113a on the side of the first layer 113a, and the height of the top surface of the second layer 113b on the side of the second layer 113b. Matches or roughly matches height.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 has a gentle slope with a higher surface on the side of the first layer 113a and a lower surface on the side of the second layer 113b.
- the insulating layers 125 and 127 have the same height as the top surface of the adjacent EL layer.
- the top surface may have a flat portion that is aligned with the height of the top surface of any of the adjacent EL layers.
- the insulating layer 125 may not be provided.
- the insulating layer 127 it is preferable to use an organic material that causes less damage to the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- the insulating layer 127 is preferably made of an organic material such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin.
- the fourth layer 114 is not provided, and the common electrode 115 is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 127, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. may be formed. That is, in a light-emitting device that emits light of different colors, all the layers constituting the EL layer may be separately manufactured. At this time, the EL layers of each light-emitting device are all formed in an island shape.
- any side surface of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c is in contact with the common electrode 115, so that the light-emitting device is short-circuited.
- the insulating layers 125 and 127 are formed on the side surfaces of the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c, the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c.
- the common electrode 115 can be prevented from coming into contact with these layers, and short-circuiting of the light-emitting device can be prevented. This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device.
- the common electrode 115 is covered.
- the forming surface has a smaller step and is flatter than the case where the insulating layers 125 and 127 are not provided. Thereby, the coverage of the common electrode 115 can be improved.
- FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16 show side by side a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed line X1-X2 in FIG. 1A and a cross-sectional view taken along the line Y1-Y2.
- an insulating film 125A is formed over the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c without removing the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c (see FIG. 15A).
- an insulating layer 127 is formed on the insulating film 125A.
- the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, 119c and the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, 118c may be removed in separate steps or may be removed in the same step. Also, the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, 118c and the insulating film 125A may be removed in separate steps or may be removed in the same step. Alternatively, the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c, the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c, and the insulating film 125A may be removed all at once.
- a region of the insulating film 125A that overlaps with the insulating layer 127 remains as the insulating layer 125.
- regions of the sacrificial layers 119a, 119b, and 119c and the sacrificial layers 118a, 118b, and 118c which overlap with the insulating layer 127 remain.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a structure in which not only the first sacrificial layer but also the second sacrificial layer remains.
- a fourth layer 114 is formed on the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c, and a common electrode 115 is formed on the fourth layer 114. can be formed.
- FIGS. 17A and 17B show side by side a cross-sectional view taken along dashed line X1-X2 and a cross-sectional view taken along Y1-Y2 in FIG. 1A.
- an EL layer having the same configuration is provided for all subpixels. may apply.
- the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c to the conductive film 129 are formed in this order over the layer 101 including the transistor. Then, as shown in FIG. 17A, the EL layer 113 is formed over the conductive film 129, the first sacrificial layer 118A is formed over the EL layer 113, and the second sacrificial layer is formed over the first sacrificial layer 118A. 119A.
- a resist mask 190 is formed on the second sacrificial layer 119A.
- the resist mask 190 is provided at a position overlapping with each of the regions that will later become the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110c.
- the resist mask 190 it is preferable to form the resist mask 190 so that the end portions of the resist mask 190 are located outside the end portions of the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c. Accordingly, the end portions of the conductive layer 129a and the first layer 113a which are formed later can be provided outside the end portion of the conductive layer 126a. Similarly, the ends of the conductive layer 129b and the second layer 113b to be formed later can be provided outside the ends of the conductive layer 126b and the ends of the conductive layer 129c and the third layer 113c to be formed later. can be provided outside the end of the conductive layer 126c.
- a sacrificial layer 119a is formed using a resist mask 190, and after removing the resist mask 190, a sacrificial layer 118a is formed using the sacrificial layer 119a as a mask. Then, using the sacrificial layers 119a and 118a as masks, part of the EL layer 113 is removed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 17B, a first layer 113a, a second layer 113b, and a third layer 113c can be formed. Since the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are layers formed by processing the EL layer 113, they have the same structure.
- the EL layer is processed three times using a resist mask.
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c can be formed only once by processing the EL layer using a resist mask. . This is preferable because the number of manufacturing steps can be reduced.
- the island-shaped EL layer is not formed using a fine metal mask, but is formed by forming an EL layer over one surface and then processing the EL layer. Therefore, the island-shaped EL layer can be formed with a uniform thickness. Then, a high-definition display device or a display device with a high aperture ratio can be realized.
- each EL layer can be manufactured with a configuration (material, film thickness, etc.) suitable for each color light-emitting device. Thereby, a light-emitting device with good characteristics can be produced.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes an insulating layer that covers side surfaces of the light-emitting layer and the carrier-transport layer.
- the EL layer is processed in a state in which the light-emitting layer and the carrier-transport layer are stacked, so that the display device has a structure in which damage to the light-emitting layer is reduced.
- the insulating layer suppresses contact between the island-shaped EL layer and the carrier injection layer or the common electrode, thereby suppressing short-circuiting of the light-emitting device.
- the display device 500 shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C has a light emitting device 550R that emits red light, a light emitting device 550G that emits green light, and a light emitting device 550B that emits blue light.
- a light-emitting device 550R shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B has a light-emitting unit 512R_1 between a pair of electrodes (electrodes 501 and 502). Similarly, light emitting device 550G has light emitting unit 512G_1 and light emitting device 550B has light emitting unit 512B_1.
- each of the light emitting devices 550R, 550G, and 550B shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B is a single light emitting device having one light emitting unit.
- a light-emitting device 550R shown in FIG. 18C has a structure in which two light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 512R_1 and light-emitting unit 512R_2) are stacked between a pair of electrodes (electrode 501 and electrode 502) with a charge generation layer 531 interposed therebetween. .
- the light emitting device 550G has a light emitting unit 512G_1 and a light emitting unit 512G_2
- the light emitting device 550B has a light emitting unit 512B_1 and a light emitting unit 512B_2.
- each of the light emitting devices 550R, 550G, and 550B shown in FIG. 18C is a tandem structure light emitting device having two light emitting units.
- a configuration in which a plurality of light-emitting units are connected in series via the charge generation layer 531, such as the light-emitting device 550R, the light-emitting device 550G, and the light-emitting device 550B shown in FIG. 18C, is referred to as a tandem structure in this specification.
- a structure having one light-emitting unit between a pair of electrodes is called a single structure.
- the tandem structure it is called a tandem structure, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the tandem structure may be called a stack structure.
- the tandem structure enables a light-emitting device capable of emitting light with high luminance.
- the tandem structure can reduce the current required to obtain the same luminance as compared with the single structure, so reliability can be improved.
- an SBS side-by-side
- the display device 500 shown in FIG. 18C has a tandem structure light emitting device and has an SBS structure. Therefore, it is possible to have both the merit of the tandem structure and the merit of the SBS structure.
- the display device 500 shown in FIG. 18C may be called a two-stage tandem structure because it has a structure in which two light-emitting units are formed in series. Further, in the two-stage tandem structure of the light-emitting device 550R shown in FIG. 18C, the structure is such that the second light-emitting unit having the red light-emitting layer is stacked on the first light-emitting unit having the red light-emitting layer. .
- the structure is such that the second light-emitting unit having the green light-emitting layer is stacked on the first light-emitting unit having the green light-emitting layer
- the two-stage tandem structure of the light-emitting device 550B has a structure in which a second light-emitting unit having a blue light-emitting layer is stacked on a first light-emitting unit having a blue light-emitting layer.
- the electrode 501 functions as a pixel electrode and is provided for each light emitting device.
- the electrode 502 functions as a common electrode and is commonly provided for a plurality of light emitting devices.
- the light-emitting unit has at least one light-emitting layer.
- the number of light-emitting layers that the light-emitting unit has does not matter, and can be one layer, two layers, three layers, or four or more layers.
- the light-emitting unit 512R_1 includes a layer 521, a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523R, a layer 524, and the like.
- FIG. 18A shows an example in which the light-emitting unit 512R_1 has a layer 525
- FIG. 18B shows an example in which the light-emitting unit 512R_1 does not have the layer 525 and the layer 525 is provided in common among the light-emitting devices.
- layer 525 can be referred to as a common layer.
- the light-emitting unit 512R_2 includes a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523R, a layer 524, and the like. Note that FIG. 18C shows an example in which the layer 525 is provided as a common layer, but the layer 525 may be provided for each light emitting device. That is, the layer 525 may be included in the light emitting unit 512R_2.
- the layer 521 includes, for example, a layer containing a highly hole-injecting substance (hole-injection layer).
- the layer 522 includes, for example, a layer containing a substance with a high hole-transport property (hole-transport layer).
- the layer 524 includes, for example, a layer containing a highly electron-transporting substance (electron-transporting layer).
- the layer 525 includes, for example, a layer containing a highly electron-injecting substance (electron-injection layer).
- layer 521 may have an electron-injection layer
- layer 522 may have an electron-transport layer
- layer 524 may have a hole-transport layer
- layer 525 may have a hole-injection layer.
- the layer 522, the light-emitting layer 523R, and the layer 524 may have the same configuration (material, film thickness, etc.) in the light-emitting unit 512R_1 and the light-emitting unit 512R_2, or may have different configurations.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the layer 521 has a function of both a hole-injection layer and a hole-transport layer, or when the layer 521 has a function of both an electron-injection layer and an electron-transport layer , the layer 522 may be omitted.
- the charge generation layer 531 has a function of injecting electrons into one of the light-emitting unit 512R_1 and the light-emitting unit 512R_2 and injecting holes into the other when a voltage is applied between the electrodes 501 and 502. have.
- the light-emitting layer 523R included in the light-emitting device 550R includes a light-emitting substance that emits red light
- the light-emitting layer 523G included in the light-emitting device 550G includes a light-emitting substance that emits green light
- 523B has a luminescent material that exhibits blue emission.
- the light-emitting device 550G and the light-emitting device 550B each have a configuration in which the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting device 550R is replaced with a light-emitting layer 523G and a light-emitting layer 523B, and other configurations are the same as those of the light-emitting device 550R. .
- the layers 521, 522, 524, and 525 may have the same configuration (material, film thickness, etc.) or different configurations in the light-emitting devices of each color.
- the light-emitting unit 512R_1, the light-emitting unit 512G_1, and the light-emitting unit 512B_1 can be formed as island-shaped layers. That is, the EL layer 113 shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B corresponds to the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, or the third layer 113c shown in FIG. 1B and the like.
- the light-emitting unit 512R_1, the charge generation layer 531, and the light-emitting unit 512R_2 can be formed as island-shaped layers.
- the light-emitting unit 512G_1, the charge generation layer 531, and the light-emitting unit 512G_2 can be formed as island-shaped layers.
- the light-emitting unit 512B_1, the charge generation layer 531, and the light-emitting unit 512B_2 can be formed as island-shaped layers. That is, the EL layer 113 illustrated in FIG. 18C corresponds to the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, or the third layer 113c illustrated in FIG. 1B and the like.
- layer 525 corresponds to fourth layer 114 shown in FIG. 1B.
- the light-emitting material of the light-emitting layer is not particularly limited.
- the light-emitting layer 523R included in the light-emitting unit 512R_1 includes a phosphorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523R included in the light-emitting unit 512R_2 includes a phosphorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523G included in the light-emitting unit 512G_1 includes
- the light-emitting layer 523G of the light-emitting unit 512G_2 contains a fluorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523B of the light-emitting unit 512B_1 contains a fluorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523B of the light-emitting unit 512B_2 contains It can be configured to have a fluorescent material.
- the light-emitting layer 523R included in the light-emitting unit 512R_1 includes a phosphorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523R included in the light-emitting unit 512R_2 includes a phosphorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523G included in the light-emitting unit 512G_1 includes The light-emitting layer 523G of the light-emitting unit 512G_2 contains a phosphorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523B of the light-emitting unit 512B_1 contains a fluorescent material
- the light-emitting layer 523B of the light-emitting unit 512B_2 contains It can be configured to have a fluorescent material.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a structure in which all the light-emitting layers are made of a fluorescent material, or a structure in which all the light-emitting layers are made of a phosphorescent material.
- the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting unit 512R_1 is made of a phosphorescent material and the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting unit 512R_2 is made of a fluorescent material, or the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting unit 512R_1 is made of a fluorescent material.
- a phosphorescent material may be used for the light-emitting layer 523R included in the light-emitting unit 512R_2, that is, a structure in which the light-emitting layer in the first stage and the light-emitting layer in the second stage are formed using different materials.
- the description here is made for the light-emitting unit 512R_1 and the light-emitting unit 512R_2, the same configuration can be applied to the light-emitting unit 512G_1 and the light-emitting unit 512G_2, and the light-emitting unit 512B_1 and the light-emitting unit 512B_2. can.
- a display device 500 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a plurality of light emitting devices 550W that emit white light.
- a colored layer 545R that transmits red light, a colored layer 545G that transmits green light, or a colored layer 545B that transmits blue light is provided on each light emitting device 550W.
- the colored layer 545R, the colored layer 545G, and the colored layer 545B are preferably provided over the light-emitting device 550W with the protective layer 540 interposed therebetween.
- a light-emitting device 550W shown in FIG. 19A has a light-emitting unit 512W between a pair of electrodes (electrodes 501 and 502).
- the light-emitting device 550W shown in FIG. 19A is a single-structure light-emitting device having one light-emitting unit.
- the light-emitting unit 512W includes a layer 521, a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523Q_1, a light-emitting layer 523Q_2, a light-emitting layer 523Q_3, a layer 524, and the like. Further, the light-emitting device 550W has a layer 525 and the like between the light-emitting unit 512W and the electrode 502. FIG. Note that the layer 525 can also be considered part of the light emitting unit 512W.
- white light emission can be obtained from the light-emitting device 550W by selecting the light-emitting layers such that the light emission of the light-emitting layers 523Q_1, 523Q_2, and 523Q_3 has a complementary color relationship.
- the light emitting unit 512W has three light emitting layers is shown here, the number of light emitting layers is not limited, and may be, for example, two layers.
- the light-emitting device 550W shown in FIG. 19A has a configuration in which the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting device 550R shown in FIG. 18B is replaced with light-emitting layers 523Q_1 to 523Q_3. is.
- a light-emitting device 550W shown in FIG. 19B has a structure in which two light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 512Q_1 and light-emitting unit 512Q_2) are stacked between a pair of electrodes (electrode 501 and electrode 502) with a charge generation layer 531 interposed therebetween. .
- the light-emitting unit 512Q_1 includes layers 521, 522, a light-emitting layer 523Q_1, a layer 524, and the like.
- the light-emitting unit 512Q_2 includes a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523Q_2, a layer 524, and the like.
- the light-emitting device 550W has a layer 525 and the like between the light-emitting unit 512Q_2 and the electrode 502. FIG. Note that the layer 525 can also be considered part of the light emitting unit 512Q_2.
- white light emission can be obtained from the light-emitting device 550W by selecting light-emitting layers such that light emitted from the light-emitting layers 523Q_1 and 523Q_2 has a complementary color relationship.
- each of the light-emitting units 512Q_1 and 512Q_2 has one light-emitting layer
- the number of light-emitting layers in each light-emitting unit does not matter.
- the light emitting units 512Q_1 and 512Q_2 may have different numbers of light emitting layers.
- one light-emitting unit may have two light-emitting layers and the other light-emitting unit may have one light-emitting layer.
- a light-emitting device 550W shown in FIG. 19B has a configuration in which the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting device 550R shown in FIG. 18C is replaced with a light-emitting layer 523Q_1 and the like, and other configurations are the same as those of the light-emitting device 550R.
- the display device 500 shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 includes a light-emitting device 550R that emits red light, a light-emitting device 550G that emits green light, a light-emitting device 550B that emits blue light, and a light-emitting device 550W that emits white light. have.
- the display device shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B is an example in which a light emitting device 550W that emits white light is provided in addition to the light emitting devices 550R, 550G, and 550B shown in FIG. 18B.
- the display device shown in FIG. 21A is an example in which a light emitting device 550W that emits white light is provided in addition to the light emitting devices 550R, 550G, and 550B shown in FIG. 18C.
- a light-emitting device 550W shown in FIGS. 20A and 21A has two light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 512Q_1 and light-emitting unit 512Q_2) stacked between a pair of electrodes (electrode 501 and electrode 502) with a charge generation layer 531 interposed therebetween. have a configuration.
- a light-emitting device 550W illustrated in FIG. 20B has three light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 512Q_1, light-emitting unit 512Q_2, and light-emitting unit 512Q_3) stacked between a pair of electrodes (electrode 501 and electrode 502) with a charge generation layer 531 interposed therebetween. configuration.
- the light-emitting unit 512Q_1 includes layers 521, 522, a light-emitting layer 523Q_1, a layer 524, and the like.
- the light-emitting unit 512Q_2 includes a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523Q_2, a layer 524, and the like.
- the light-emitting unit 512Q_3 includes a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523Q_3, a layer 524, and the like.
- white light emission can be obtained from the light-emitting device 550W by selecting light-emitting layers such that light emitted from the light-emitting layers 523Q_1 and 523Q_2 has a complementary color relationship.
- white light emission can be obtained from the light-emitting device 550W by selecting light-emitting layers such that the light emission of the light-emitting layers 523Q_1, 523Q_2, and 523Q_3 has a complementary color relationship. .
- the light-emitting device 550W has a configuration in which the light-emitting layer 523R of the light-emitting device 550R is replaced with a light-emitting layer 523Q_1 or the like, and other configurations are the same as those of the light-emitting device 550R.
- the light-emitting device 550R that emits red light
- the light-emitting device 550G that emits green light
- the light-emitting device 550B that emits blue light
- the light-emitting device 550W that emits white light
- a light-emitting device 550R has a light-emitting unit 512R_3 stacked on a light-emitting unit 512R_2 with a charge generation layer 531 interposed therebetween.
- the light-emitting unit 512R_3 includes a layer 522, a light-emitting layer 523R, a layer 524, and the like.
- a configuration similar to that of the light emitting unit 512R_2 can be applied to the light emitting unit 512R_3.
- FIG. 22A shows an example in which a light emitting device 550W that emits white light is provided in addition to the light emitting devices 550R, 550G, and 550B shown in FIG. 18A.
- a light-emitting device 550W shown in FIG. 22A has a structure in which n light-emitting units (n is an integer of 2 or more) are stacked between a pair of electrodes (electrodes 501 and 502) with a charge generation layer 531 interposed therebetween. .
- the light-emitting device 550W has n light-emitting units from the light-emitting unit 512Q_1 to the light-emitting unit 512Q_n, and the light from these light-emitting units has a complementary color relationship, so that white light can be emitted.
- the light emitting device 550R emitting red light, the light emitting device 550G emitting green light, the light emitting device 550B emitting blue light, and the light emitting device 550W emitting white light are all n light emitting units. (n is an integer of 2 or more) are stacked.
- the light-emitting device 550R has n light-emitting units, light-emitting units 512R_1 to 512R_n, each having a light-emitting layer that emits red light.
- the light-emitting device 550G has n light-emitting units from light-emitting unit 512G_1 to light-emitting unit 512G_n, each having a light-emitting layer that emits green light.
- the light-emitting device 550B has n light-emitting units from light-emitting unit 512B_1 to light-emitting unit 512B_n each having a light-emitting layer that emits blue light.
- the luminance obtained from the light-emitting device with the same amount of current can be increased according to the number of stacked layers.
- the current required to obtain the same luminance can be reduced, so the power consumption of the light-emitting device can be reduced according to the number of stacked layers.
- the display device of this embodiment can be a high-resolution display device or a large-sized display device. Therefore, the display device of the present embodiment includes a relatively large screen such as a television device, a desktop or notebook personal computer, a computer monitor, a digital signage, a large game machine such as a pachinko machine, or the like. In addition to electronic devices, it can be used for display portions of digital cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, portable game machines, personal digital assistants, and sound reproducing devices.
- FIG. 23 shows a perspective view of the display device 100A
- FIG. 24A shows a cross-sectional view of the display device 100A.
- the display device 100A has a configuration in which a substrate 152 and a substrate 151 are bonded together.
- the substrate 152 is clearly indicated by dashed lines.
- the display device 100A includes a display portion 162, a connection portion 140, a circuit 164, wirings 165, and the like.
- FIG. 23 shows an example in which an IC 173 and an FPC 172 are mounted on the display device 100A. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIG. 23 can also be said to be a display module including the display device 100A, an IC (integrated circuit), and an FPC.
- the connecting portion 140 is provided outside the display portion 162 .
- the connection portion 140 can be provided along one side or a plurality of sides of the display portion 162 .
- the number of connection parts 140 may be singular or plural.
- FIG. 23 shows an example in which connecting portions 140 are provided so as to surround the four sides of the display portion.
- the connection part 140 the common electrode of the light emitting device and the conductive layer are electrically connected, and a potential can be supplied to the common electrode.
- a scanning line driver circuit can be used.
- the wiring 165 has a function of supplying signals and power to the display portion 162 and the circuit 164 .
- the signal and power are input to the wiring 165 from the outside through the FPC 172 or input to the wiring 165 from the IC 173 .
- FIG. 23 shows an example in which an IC 173 is provided on a substrate 151 by a COG (Chip On Glass) method, a COF (Chip On Film) method, or the like.
- a COG Chip On Glass
- COF Chip On Film
- the IC 173 for example, an IC having a scanning line driver circuit or a signal line driver circuit can be applied.
- the display device 100A and the display module may be configured without an IC.
- the IC may be mounted on the FPC by the COF method or the like.
- part of the area including the FPC 172, part of the circuit 164, part of the display part 162, part of the connection part 140, and part of the area including the end of the display device 100A are cut off.
- An example of a cross section is shown.
- the display device 100A illustrated in FIG. 24A includes a transistor 201 and a transistor 205, a light-emitting device 130a that emits red light, a light-emitting device 130b that emits green light, and a light-emitting device 130b that emits blue light. It has a device 130c and the like.
- the three sub-pixels include sub-pixels of three colors of R, G, and B, yellow ( Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M) sub-pixels.
- the four sub-pixels include R, G, B, and white (W) sub-pixels, and R, G, B, and Y four-color sub-pixels. be done.
- the light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c each have a structure similar to the stacked structure shown in FIG. 1B, except that the pixel electrodes have different configurations.
- Embodiment 1 can be referred to for details of the light-emitting device.
- the light emitting device 130a has a conductive layer 111a, a conductive layer 112a on the conductive layer 111a, a conductive layer 126a on the conductive layer 112a, and a conductive layer 129a on the conductive layer 126a. All of the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a can be called pixel electrodes, and some of them can be called pixel electrodes.
- the conductive layer 111 a is connected to the conductive layer 222 b included in the transistor 205 through an opening provided in the insulating layer 214 .
- the end of the conductive layer 112a is positioned outside the end of the conductive layer 111a.
- the edges of the conductive layer 112a and the edges of the conductive layer 126a are aligned or substantially aligned.
- the ends of the conductive layer 129a are located outside the ends of the conductive layers 112a and 126a.
- the edges of the conductive layer 129a and the edges of the first layer 113a are aligned or substantially aligned.
- a conductive layer functioning as a reflective electrode can be used for the conductive layers 111a and 112a
- a conductive layer functioning as a transparent electrode can be used for the conductive layers 126a and 129a.
- the conductive layers 111b, 112b, 126b, and 129b in the light-emitting device 130b and the conductive layers 111c, 112c, 126c, and 129c in the light-emitting device 130c are the same as the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, and 129a in the light-emitting device 130a. Detailed description is omitted.
- Concave portions are formed in the conductive layers 111 a , 111 b , and 111 c so as to cover the openings provided in the insulating layer 214 .
- a layer 128 is embedded in the recess.
- the layer 128 has a function of planarizing recesses of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c.
- Conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c electrically connected to the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c are provided over the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c and the layer 128, respectively. Therefore, regions overlapping the recesses of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c can also be used as light emitting regions, and the aperture ratio of pixels can be increased.
- Layer 128 may be an insulating layer or a conductive layer.
- Various inorganic insulating materials, organic insulating materials, and conductive materials can be used as appropriate for layer 128 .
- layer 128 is preferably formed using an insulating material.
- an insulating layer containing an organic material can be preferably used.
- an acrylic resin, a polyimide resin, an epoxy resin, a polyamide resin, a polyimideamide resin, a siloxane resin, a benzocyclobutene resin, a phenol resin, precursors of these resins, or the like can be applied.
- a photosensitive resin can be used as the layer 128 .
- a positive material or a negative material can be used for the photosensitive resin.
- the layer 128 can be formed only through exposure and development steps, and the influence of dry etching, wet etching, or the like on the surfaces of the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c can be reduced. can. Further, when the layer 128 is formed using a negative photosensitive resin, the layer 128 can be formed using the same photomask (exposure mask) used for forming the opening of the insulating layer 214 in some cases. be.
- top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 112a and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 126a are covered with the conductive layer 129a and the first layer 113a.
- the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 112b and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 126b are covered with the conductive layer 129b and the second layer 113b.
- the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 112c and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 126c are covered with the conductive layer 129c and the third layer 113c.
- the entire regions where the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c are provided can be used as the light-emitting regions of the light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c, so that the aperture ratio of pixels can be increased.
- a sacrificial layer 118 a is located between the first layer 113 a and the insulating layer 125 .
- a sacrificial layer 118b is positioned between the second layer 113b and the insulating layer 125, and a sacrificial layer 118c is positioned between the third layer 113c and the insulating layer 125.
- a fourth layer 114 is provided over the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, the third layer 113c, and the insulating layers 125 and 127, and the common electrode 115 is provided over the fourth layer 114. ing.
- a protective layer 131 is provided on each of the light emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c.
- the protective layer 131 and the substrate 152 are adhered via the adhesive layer 142 .
- a solid sealing structure, a hollow sealing structure, or the like can be applied to sealing the light-emitting device.
- the space between substrates 152 and 151 is filled with an adhesive layer 142 to apply a solid sealing structure.
- the space may be filled with an inert gas (such as nitrogen or argon) to apply a hollow sealing structure.
- the adhesive layer 142 may be provided so as not to overlap the light emitting device.
- the space may be filled with a resin different from the adhesive layer 142 provided in a frame shape.
- a conductive layer 123 is provided over the insulating layer 214 in the connection portion 140 .
- the conductive layer 123 includes a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c and a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c. , a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c, and a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 129a, 129b, and 129c.
- a fourth layer 114 is provided over the conductive layer 123 and a common electrode 115 is provided over the fourth layer 114 .
- the conductive layer 123 and common electrode 115 are electrically connected through the fourth layer 114 .
- the fourth layer 114 may not be formed on the connecting portion 140 . In this case, the conductive layer 123 and the common electrode 115 are directly contacted and electrically connected.
- the display device 100A is of a top emission type. Light emitted by the light emitting device is emitted to the substrate 152 side. A material having high visible light transmittance is preferably used for the substrate 152 .
- the pixel electrode contains a material that reflects visible light, and the counter electrode (common electrode 115) contains a material that transmits visible light.
- a stacked structure from the substrate 151 to the insulating layer 214 corresponds to the layer 101 including the transistor in Embodiment 1.
- FIG. 1 A stacked structure from the substrate 151 to the insulating layer 214 corresponds to the layer 101 including the transistor in Embodiment 1.
- Both the transistor 201 and the transistor 205 are formed over the substrate 151 . These transistors can be made with the same material and the same process.
- An insulating layer 211 , an insulating layer 213 , an insulating layer 215 , and an insulating layer 214 are provided in this order over the substrate 151 .
- Part of the insulating layer 211 functions as a gate insulating layer of each transistor.
- Part of the insulating layer 213 functions as a gate insulating layer of each transistor.
- An insulating layer 215 is provided over the transistor.
- An insulating layer 214 is provided over the transistor and functions as a planarization layer. Note that the number of gate insulating layers and the number of insulating layers covering a transistor are not limited, and each may have a single layer or two or more layers.
- a material into which impurities such as water and hydrogen are difficult to diffuse is preferably used for at least one insulating layer that covers the transistor. This allows the insulating layer to function as a barrier layer. With such a structure, diffusion of impurities from the outside into the transistor can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of the display device can be improved.
- An inorganic insulating film is preferably used for each of the insulating layers 211 , 213 , and 215 .
- the inorganic insulating film for example, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, an aluminum nitride film, or the like can be used.
- a hafnium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a tantalum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a cerium oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, or the like may be used.
- two or more of the insulating films described above may be laminated and used.
- An organic insulating film is suitable for the insulating layer 214 that functions as a planarization layer.
- materials that can be used for the organic insulating film include acrylic resins, polyimide resins, epoxy resins, polyamide resins, polyimideamide resins, siloxane resins, benzocyclobutene-based resins, phenolic resins, precursors of these resins, and the like.
- the insulating layer 214 may have a laminated structure of an organic insulating film and an inorganic insulating film. The outermost layer of the insulating layer 214 preferably functions as an etching protection film.
- a recess in the insulating layer 214 can be suppressed when the conductive layer 111a, the conductive layer 112a, or the conductive layer 126a is processed.
- recesses may be provided in the insulating layer 214 when the conductive layers 111a, 112a, 126a, or the like are processed.
- the transistors 201 and 205 include a conductive layer 221 functioning as a gate, an insulating layer 211 functioning as a gate insulating layer, conductive layers 222a and 222b functioning as sources and drains, a semiconductor layer 231, and an insulating layer functioning as a gate insulating layer. It has a layer 213 and a conductive layer 223 that functions as a gate. Here, the same hatching pattern is applied to a plurality of layers obtained by processing the same conductive film.
- the insulating layer 211 is located between the conductive layer 221 and the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the insulating layer 213 is located between the conductive layer 223 and the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the structure of the transistor included in the display device of this embodiment there is no particular limitation on the structure of the transistor included in the display device of this embodiment.
- a planar transistor, a staggered transistor, an inverted staggered transistor, or the like can be used.
- the transistor structure may be either a top-gate type or a bottom-gate type.
- gates may be provided above and below a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed.
- a structure in which a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed is sandwiched between two gates is applied to the transistors 201 and 205 .
- a transistor may be driven by connecting two gates and applying the same signal to them.
- the threshold voltage of the transistor may be controlled by applying a potential for controlling the threshold voltage to one of the two gates and applying a potential for driving to the other.
- crystallinity of a semiconductor material used for a transistor there is no particular limitation on the crystallinity of a semiconductor material used for a transistor, and an amorphous semiconductor, a single crystal semiconductor, or a semiconductor having a crystallinity other than a single crystal (a microcrystalline semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, or a semiconductor having a crystal region in part) can be used. semiconductor) may be used. A single crystal semiconductor or a crystalline semiconductor is preferably used because deterioration in transistor characteristics can be suppressed.
- a semiconductor layer of a transistor preferably includes a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor).
- the display device of this embodiment preferably uses a transistor including a metal oxide for a channel formation region (hereinafter referred to as an OS transistor).
- the semiconductor layer of the transistor may comprise silicon. Examples of silicon include amorphous silicon and crystalline silicon (low-temperature polysilicon, monocrystalline silicon, etc.).
- the semiconductor layer includes, for example, indium and M (M is gallium, aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, tin, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, one or more selected from hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, and magnesium) and zinc.
- M is preferably one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, yttrium, and tin.
- an oxide containing indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn) (also referred to as IGZO) is preferably used for the semiconductor layer.
- an oxide containing indium, tin, and zinc is preferably used.
- oxides containing indium, gallium, tin, and zinc are preferably used.
- the In atomic ratio in the In-M-Zn oxide is preferably equal to or higher than the M atomic ratio.
- the transistors included in the circuit 164 and the transistors included in the display portion 162 may have the same structure or different structures.
- the plurality of transistors included in the circuit 164 may all have the same structure, or may have two or more types.
- the structures of the plurality of transistors included in the display portion 162 may all be the same, or may be of two or more types.
- 24B and 24C show other configuration examples of the transistor.
- the transistor 209 and the transistor 210 each include a conductive layer 221 functioning as a gate, an insulating layer 211 functioning as a gate insulating layer, a semiconductor layer 231 having a channel formation region 231i and a pair of low-resistance regions 231n, and one of the pair of low-resistance regions 231n.
- a conductive layer 222a connected to a pair of low-resistance regions 231n, a conductive layer 222b connected to the other of a pair of low-resistance regions 231n, an insulating layer 225 functioning as a gate insulating layer, a conductive layer 223 functioning as a gate, and an insulating layer 215 covering the conductive layer 223 have
- the insulating layer 211 is located between the conductive layer 221 and the channel formation region 231i.
- the insulating layer 225 is located at least between the conductive layer 223 and the channel formation region 231i.
- an insulating layer 218 may be provided to cover the transistor.
- the transistor 209 illustrated in FIG. 24B illustrates an example in which the insulating layer 225 covers the top surface and side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the conductive layers 222a and 222b are connected to the low-resistance region 231n through openings provided in the insulating layers 225 and 215, respectively.
- One of the conductive layers 222a and 222b functions as a source and the other functions as a drain.
- the insulating layer 225 overlaps with the channel formation region 231i of the semiconductor layer 231 and does not overlap with the low resistance region 231n.
- the insulating layer 215 is provided to cover the insulating layer 225 and the conductive layer 223, and the conductive layers 222a and 222b are connected to the low resistance regions 231n through openings in the insulating layer 215, respectively.
- a connection portion 204 is provided in a region of the substrate 151 where the substrate 152 does not overlap.
- the wiring 165 is electrically connected to the FPC 172 via the conductive layer 166 and the connecting layer 242 .
- the conductive layer 166 includes a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 111a, 111b, and 111c and a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 112a, 112b, and 112c. , and a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 126a, 126b, and 126c.
- the conductive layer 166 is exposed on the upper surface of the connecting portion 204 . Thereby, the connecting portion 204 and the FPC 172 can be electrically connected via the connecting layer 242 .
- a light shielding layer 117 is preferably provided on the surface of the substrate 152 on the substrate 151 side.
- the light shielding layer 117 can be provided between adjacent light emitting devices, the connection portion 140, the circuit 164, and the like.
- various optical members can be arranged outside the substrate 152 . Examples of optical members include polarizing plates, retardation plates, light diffusion layers (diffusion films, etc.), antireflection layers, light collecting films, and the like.
- an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust, a water-repellent film that prevents adhesion of dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use, a shock absorption layer, etc. are arranged on the outside of the substrate 152.
- an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust, a water-repellent film that prevents adhesion of dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use, a shock absorption layer, etc. are arranged. may
- the protective layer 131 that covers the light-emitting device, it is possible to prevent impurities such as water from entering the light-emitting device and improve the reliability of the light-emitting device.
- Glass, quartz, ceramic, sapphire, resin, metal, alloy, semiconductor, or the like can be used for the substrates 151 and 152, respectively.
- a material that transmits the light is used for the substrate on the side from which the light from the light-emitting device is extracted.
- the flexibility of the display device can be increased.
- a polarizing plate may be used as the substrate 151 or the substrate 152 .
- polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyacrylonitrile resins, acrylic resins, polyimide resins, polymethyl methacrylate resins, polycarbonate (PC) resins, and polyether resins are used, respectively.
- PES resin Sulfone (PES) resin, polyamide resin (nylon, aramid, etc.), polysiloxane resin, cycloolefin resin, polystyrene resin, polyamideimide resin, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polypropylene resin, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) resin, ABS resin, cellulose nanofiber, or the like can be used.
- PES polyamide resin
- aramid polysiloxane resin
- polystyrene resin polyamideimide resin
- polyurethane resin polyvinyl chloride resin
- polyvinylidene chloride resin polypropylene resin
- PTFE resin polytetrafluoroethylene
- ABS resin cellulose nanofiber, or the like
- One or both of the substrates 151 and 152 may be made of glass having a thickness sufficient to be flexible.
- a substrate having high optical isotropy is preferably used as the substrate of the display device.
- a substrate with high optical isotropy has small birefringence (it can be said that the amount of birefringence is small).
- the absolute value of the retardation (retardation) value of the substrate with high optical isotropy is preferably 30 nm or less, more preferably 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 10 nm or less.
- Films with high optical isotropy include triacetylcellulose (TAC, also called cellulose triacetate) films, cycloolefin polymer (COP) films, cycloolefin copolymer (COC) films, and acrylic films.
- TAC triacetylcellulose
- COP cycloolefin polymer
- COC cycloolefin copolymer
- the film when a film is used as the substrate, the film may absorb water, which may cause a change in shape such as wrinkling of the display panel. Therefore, it is preferable to use a film having a low water absorption rate as the substrate. For example, it is preferable to use a film with a water absorption of 1% or less, more preferably 0.1% or less, and even more preferably 0.01% or less.
- various curable adhesives such as photocurable adhesives such as ultraviolet curable adhesives, reaction curable adhesives, thermosetting adhesives, and anaerobic adhesives can be used.
- These adhesives include epoxy resins, acrylic resins, silicone resins, phenol resins, polyimide resins, imide resins, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resins, PVB (polyvinyl butyral) resins, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resins, and the like.
- a material with low moisture permeability such as epoxy resin is preferable.
- a two-liquid mixed type resin may be used.
- an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.
- connection layer 242 an anisotropic conductive film (ACF), an anisotropic conductive paste (ACP), or the like can be used.
- ACF anisotropic conductive film
- ACP anisotropic conductive paste
- materials that can be used for conductive layers such as various wirings and electrodes constituting display devices include aluminum, titanium, chromium, nickel, copper, yttrium, zirconium, molybdenum, silver, Examples include metals such as tantalum and tungsten, and alloys containing these metals as main components. A film containing these materials can be used as a single layer or as a laminated structure.
- a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide containing gallium, or graphene
- metal materials such as gold, silver, platinum, magnesium, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, palladium, and titanium, or alloy materials containing such metal materials can be used.
- a nitride of the metal material eg, titanium nitride
- it is preferably thin enough to have translucency.
- a stacked film of any of the above materials can be used as the conductive layer.
- a laminated film of a silver-magnesium alloy and indium tin oxide because the conductivity can be increased.
- conductive layers such as various wirings and electrodes that constitute a display device, and conductive layers (conductive layers functioning as pixel electrodes or common electrodes) of light-emitting devices.
- Examples of insulating materials that can be used for each insulating layer include resins such as acrylic resins and epoxy resins, and inorganic insulating materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, and aluminum oxide.
- Display device 100B A display device 100B shown in FIG. 25A is mainly different from the display device 100A in that it is a bottom-emission type display device in which a white light emitting device and a color filter are combined. In the following description of the display device, the description of the same parts as those of the previously described display device may be omitted.
- Light emitted by the light emitting device is emitted to the substrate 151 side.
- a material having high visible light transmittance is preferably used for the substrate 151 .
- the material used for the substrate 152 may or may not be translucent.
- a light-blocking layer 117 is preferably formed between the substrate 151 and the transistor 201 and between the substrate 151 and the transistor 205 .
- FIG. 25A shows an example in which a light-blocking layer 117 is provided over a substrate 151 , an insulating layer 153 is provided over the light-blocking layer 117 , and transistors 201 and 205 and the like are provided over the insulating layer 153 .
- the light emitting device 130a and the colored layer 132R overlap each other, and light emitted from the light emitting device 130a is extracted as red light to the outside of the display device 100B through the red colored layer 132R.
- the light emitting device 130b and the green colored layer 132G overlap each other, and light emitted from the light emitting device 130b is extracted as green light to the outside of the display device 100B through the colored layer 132G.
- Both light emitting devices 130a and 130b may be configured to emit white light. That is, the first layer 113a and the second layer 113b can have the same structure. In FIG. 25A, the first layer 113a and the second layer 113b are illustrated as three layers. Specifically, a stack of a first light emitting unit, a charge generation layer, and a second light emitting unit. structure can be applied.
- the display device 100B can be manufactured using Method Example 3 for manufacturing a display device described in Embodiment 1. FIG.
- FIGS. 24A and 25A show an example in which the layer 128 has a flat portion on the upper surface, but the shape of the layer 128 is not particularly limited.
- a variation of layer 128 is shown in Figures 25B-25D.
- the upper surface of the layer 128 can be configured to have a shape in which the center and the vicinity thereof are depressed in a cross-sectional view, that is, a shape having a concave curved surface.
- the upper surface of the layer 128 can be configured to have a shape in which the center and the vicinity thereof bulge in a cross-sectional view, that is, have a convex curved surface.
- the top surface of layer 128 may have one or both of convex and concave surfaces.
- the number of convex curved surfaces and concave curved surfaces that the upper surface of the layer 128 has is not limited, and may be one or more.
- the height of the top surface of the layer 128 and the height of the top surface of the conductive layer 111a may be the same or substantially the same, or may be different from each other.
- the height of the top surface of layer 128 may be lower or higher than the height of the top surface of conductive layer 111a.
- FIG. 25B can also be said to be an example in which the layer 128 is accommodated inside the recess formed in the conductive layer 111a.
- the layer 128 may exist outside the recess formed in the conductive layer 111a, that is, the upper surface of the layer 128 may be wider than the recess.
- Display device 100C A display device 100C shown in FIG. 26 is mainly different from the display device 100A in that a tandem-structured light-emitting device is used.
- FIG. 26 illustrates three layers each of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c. can be applied.
- the configuration shown in FIG. 18C described in Embodiment 2 can be applied to the display device 100C.
- the first layer 113a can have a structure in which a second light-emitting unit having a red light-emitting layer is stacked over a first light-emitting unit having a red light-emitting layer.
- the second layer 113b can have a structure in which a second light-emitting unit having a green light-emitting layer is stacked over a first light-emitting unit having a green light-emitting layer.
- a structure in which a second light-emitting unit having a blue light-emitting layer is stacked over a first light-emitting unit having a blue light-emitting layer can be applied to the third layer 113c.
- luminance of a display device can be increased.
- the current required for obtaining the same luminance can be reduced, so that the reliability of the display device can be improved.
- Display device 100D A display device 100D shown in FIG. 27 is mainly different from the display device 100A in that it has a light receiving device 130d.
- the light receiving device 130d has a conductive layer 111d, a conductive layer 112d on the conductive layer 111d, a conductive layer 126d on the conductive layer 112d, and a conductive layer 129d on the conductive layer 126d.
- the conductive layer 111 d is connected to the conductive layer 222 b included in the transistor 205 through an opening provided in the insulating layer 214 .
- the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 112d and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 126d are covered with the conductive layer 129d and the fifth layer 113d.
- the fifth layer 113d has at least an active layer.
- the side surfaces of the conductive layer 129d and the fifth layer 113d are covered with insulating layers 125 and 127, respectively.
- a sacrificial layer 118 d is located between the fifth layer 113 d and the insulating layer 125 .
- a fourth layer 114 is provided over the fifth layer 113 d and the insulating layers 125 and 127 , and a common electrode 115 is provided over the fourth layer 114 .
- the fourth layer 114 is a series of films commonly provided for the light receiving device and the light emitting device.
- the display device 100D for example, the pixel layout shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D described in Embodiment 1 can be applied.
- the light receiving device 130d can be provided in the sub-pixel PS or the sub-pixel IRS. Further, Embodiment 1 can be referred to for details of the display device including the light receiving device.
- the display device of this embodiment can be a high-definition display device. Therefore, the display device of the present embodiment includes, for example, information terminals (wearable devices) such as a wristwatch type and a bracelet type, devices for VR such as a head-mounted display, devices for AR such as glasses, and the like. It can be used for the display part of wearable equipment.
- information terminals wearable devices
- VR such as a head-mounted display
- AR such as glasses
- Display module A perspective view of the display module 280 is shown in FIG. 28A.
- the display module 280 has a display device 100E and an FPC 290 .
- the display device included in the display module 280 is not limited to the display device 100E, and may be any of the display devices 100F to 100L described later.
- the display module 280 has substrates 291 and 292 .
- the display module 280 has a display section 281 .
- the display unit 281 is an area for displaying an image in the display module 280, and is an area where light from each pixel provided in the pixel unit 284, which will be described later, can be visually recognized.
- FIG. 28B shows a perspective view schematically showing the configuration on the substrate 291 side.
- a circuit section 282 , a pixel circuit section 283 on the circuit section 282 , and a pixel section 284 on the pixel circuit section 283 are stacked on the substrate 291 .
- a terminal portion 285 for connecting to the FPC 290 is provided on a portion of the substrate 291 that does not overlap with the pixel portion 284 .
- the terminal portion 285 and the circuit portion 282 are electrically connected by a wiring portion 286 composed of a plurality of wirings.
- the pixel section 284 has a plurality of periodically arranged pixels 284a. An enlarged view of one pixel 284a is shown on the right side of FIG. 28B. Pixel 284a has light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c that emit light of different colors. A plurality of light emitting devices can be arranged in a stripe arrangement as shown in FIG. 28B. In addition, various light emitting device arrangement methods such as delta arrangement or pentile arrangement can be applied.
- the pixel circuit section 283 has a plurality of pixel circuits 283a arranged periodically.
- One pixel circuit 283a is a circuit that controls light emission of three light emitting devices included in one pixel 284a.
- One pixel circuit 283a may have a structure in which three circuits for controlling light emission of one light emitting device are provided.
- the pixel circuit 283a can have at least one selection transistor, one current control transistor (driving transistor), and a capacitive element for each light emitting device. At this time, a gate signal is input to the gate of the selection transistor, and a source signal is input to either the source or the drain of the selection transistor. This realizes an active matrix display device.
- the circuit section 282 has a circuit that drives each pixel circuit 283 a of the pixel circuit section 283 .
- a circuit that drives each pixel circuit 283 a of the pixel circuit section 283 For example, it is preferable to have one or both of a gate line driver circuit and a source line driver circuit.
- at least one of an arithmetic circuit, a memory circuit, a power supply circuit, and the like may be provided.
- the FPC 290 functions as wiring for supplying a video signal, power supply potential, or the like to the circuit section 282 from the outside. Also, an IC may be mounted on the FPC 290 .
- the aperture ratio (effective display area ratio) of the display portion 281 is can be very high.
- the aperture ratio of the display section 281 can be 40% or more and less than 100%, preferably 50% or more and 95% or less, more preferably 60% or more and 95% or less.
- the pixels 284a can be arranged at an extremely high density, and the definition of the display portion 281 can be extremely high.
- the pixels 284a may be arranged with a resolution of 2000 ppi or more, preferably 3000 ppi or more, more preferably 5000 ppi or more, and still more preferably 6000 ppi or more, and 20000 ppi or less, or 30000 ppi or less. preferable.
- a display module 280 Since such a display module 280 has extremely high definition, it can be suitably used for equipment for VR such as a head-mounted display, or equipment for glasses-type AR. For example, even in the case of a configuration in which the display portion of the display module 280 is viewed through a lens, the display module 280 has an extremely high-definition display portion 281, so pixels cannot be viewed even if the display portion is enlarged with the lens. , a highly immersive display can be performed. Moreover, the display module 280 is not limited to this, and can be suitably used for electronic equipment having a relatively small display unit. For example, it can be suitably used for a display part of a wearable electronic device such as a wristwatch.
- a display device 100E illustrated in FIG. 29A includes a substrate 301, light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c, a capacitor 240, and a transistor 310.
- the display device 100E illustrated in FIG. 29A includes a substrate 301, light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c, a capacitor 240, and a transistor 310.
- the display device 100E illustrated in FIG. 29A includes a substrate 301, light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c, a capacitor 240, and a transistor 310.
- Substrate 301 corresponds to substrate 291 in FIGS. 28A and 28B.
- a stacked structure from the substrate 301 to the insulating layer 255b corresponds to the layer 101 including the transistor in Embodiment 1.
- FIG. 1
- a transistor 310 has a channel formation region in the substrate 301 .
- the substrate 301 for example, a semiconductor substrate such as a single crystal silicon substrate can be used.
- Transistor 310 includes a portion of substrate 301 , conductive layer 311 , low resistance region 312 , insulating layer 313 and insulating layer 314 .
- the conductive layer 311 functions as a gate electrode.
- An insulating layer 313 is located between the substrate 301 and the conductive layer 311 and functions as a gate insulating layer.
- the low-resistance region 312 is a region in which the substrate 301 is doped with impurities and functions as either a source or a drain.
- the insulating layer 314 is provided to cover the side surface of the conductive layer 311 .
- a device isolation layer 315 is provided between two adjacent transistors 310 so as to be embedded in the substrate 301 .
- An insulating layer 261 is provided to cover the transistor 310 and a capacitor 240 is provided over the insulating layer 261 .
- the capacitor 240 has a conductive layer 241, a conductive layer 245, and an insulating layer 243 positioned therebetween.
- the conductive layer 241 functions as one electrode of the capacitor 240
- the conductive layer 245 functions as the other electrode of the capacitor 240
- the insulating layer 243 functions as the dielectric of the capacitor 240 .
- the conductive layer 241 is provided over the insulating layer 261 and embedded in the insulating layer 254 .
- Conductive layer 241 is electrically connected to one of the source or drain of transistor 310 by plug 271 embedded in insulating layer 261 .
- An insulating layer 243 is provided over the conductive layer 241 .
- the conductive layer 245 is provided in a region overlapping with the conductive layer 241 with the insulating layer 243 provided therebetween.
- An insulating layer 255a is provided to cover the capacitor 240, an insulating layer 255b is provided on the insulating layer 255a, and the light emitting devices 130a, 130b, 130c, etc. are provided on the insulating layer 255b.
- This embodiment shows an example in which light-emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c have a structure similar to the laminated structure shown in FIG. 1B. Side surfaces of the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c are covered with insulating layers 125 and 127, respectively.
- a sacrificial layer 118a is located on the first layer 113a.
- One edge of the sacrificial layer 118a is aligned or substantially aligned with an edge of the first layer 113a, and the other edge of the sacrificial layer 118a is located on the first layer 113a.
- one edge of sacrificial layer 118b on second layer 113b is aligned or substantially aligned with an edge of second layer 113b.
- the other end of sacrificial layer 118b is located on second layer 113b.
- One edge of the sacrificial layer 118c on the third layer 113c is aligned or substantially aligned with the edge of the third layer 113c.
- the other end of sacrificial layer 118c is located on third layer 113c.
- a fourth layer 114 is provided over the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, the third layer 113c, and the insulating layers 125 and 127, and the common electrode 115 is provided over the fourth layer 114.
- a protective layer 131 is provided on the light emitting devices 130a, 130b, and 130c.
- a substrate 120 is bonded onto the protective layer 131 with a resin layer 122 .
- Embodiment 1 can be referred to for details of the components from the light emitting device to the substrate 120 .
- Substrate 120 corresponds to substrate 292 in FIG. 28A.
- various inorganic insulating films such as an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, and a nitride oxide insulating film can be preferably used.
- an oxide insulating film or an oxynitride insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, or an aluminum oxide film is preferably used.
- a nitride insulating film or a nitride oxide insulating film such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride oxide film is preferably used.
- a silicon oxide film as the insulating layer 255a and a silicon nitride film as the insulating layer 255b.
- the insulating layer 255b preferably functions as an etching protection film.
- a nitride insulating film or a nitride oxide insulating film may be used as the insulating layer 255a, and an oxide insulating film or an oxynitride insulating film may be used as the insulating layer 255b.
- an example in which the insulating layer 255b is provided with the recessed portion is shown; however, the insulating layer 255b may not be provided with the recessed portion.
- the pixel electrode of the light emitting device is connected to one of the source or drain of transistor 310 by plugs 256 embedded in insulating layers 255a, 255b, conductive layers 241 embedded in insulating layers 254, and plugs 271 embedded in insulating layers 261. is electrically connected to The height of the upper surface of the insulating layer 255b and the height of the upper surface of the plug 256 match or substantially match.
- Various conductive materials can be used for the plug.
- Display device 100F A display device 100F shown in FIG. 29B is an example in which colored layers 132R, 132G, and 132B are provided on a protective layer 131. In FIG. In the following description of the display device, the description of the same parts as those of the previously described display device may be omitted.
- the light emitting device 130a and the colored layer 132R overlap each other, and light emitted from the light emitting device 130a is extracted as red light to the outside of the display device 100F through the red colored layer 132R.
- the light emitting device 130b and the green colored layer 132G overlap each other, and light emitted from the light emitting device 130b is extracted as green light to the outside of the display device 100F through the colored layer 132G.
- the light emitting device 130c and the blue colored layer 132B overlap each other, and light emitted from the light emitting device 130c is extracted as blue light to the outside of the display device 100F through the colored layer 132B.
- FIG. 29B shows an example in which the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c have EL layers with the same structure.
- light emitting devices 130a, 130b, 130c may be configured to emit white light.
- the first layer 113a, the second layer 113b, and the third layer 113c may have different configurations.
- a substrate 120 is attached to the colored layers 132R, 132G, and 132B with a resin layer 122. As shown in FIG.
- a display device 100G shown in FIG. 29C is an example in which a substrate 120 provided with colored layers 132R, 132G, and 132B is bonded onto a protective layer 131 with a resin layer 122.
- FIG. 29C A display device 100G shown in FIG. 29C is an example in which a substrate 120 provided with colored layers 132R, 132G, and 132B is bonded onto a protective layer 131 with a resin layer 122.
- Display device 100H A display device 100H shown in FIG. 30 is mainly different from the display device 100E in that the configuration of transistors is different.
- the transistor 320 is a transistor (OS transistor) in which a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) is applied to a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed.
- OS transistor a transistor in which a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) is applied to a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed.
- the transistor 320 has a semiconductor layer 321 , an insulating layer 323 , a conductive layer 324 , a pair of conductive layers 325 , an insulating layer 326 , and a conductive layer 327 .
- the substrate 331 corresponds to the substrate 291 in FIGS. 28A and 28B.
- a stacked structure from the substrate 331 to the insulating layer 255b corresponds to the layer 101 including the transistor in Embodiment 1.
- An insulating layer 332 is provided over the substrate 331 .
- the insulating layer 332 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing from the substrate 331 into the transistor 320 and oxygen from the semiconductor layer 321 toward the insulating layer 332 side.
- a film into which hydrogen or oxygen is less likely to diffuse than a silicon oxide film such as an aluminum oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, or a silicon nitride film, can be used.
- a conductive layer 327 is provided over the insulating layer 332 and an insulating layer 326 is provided to cover the conductive layer 327 .
- the conductive layer 327 functions as a first gate electrode of the transistor 320, and part of the insulating layer 326 functions as a first gate insulating layer.
- An oxide insulating film such as a silicon oxide film is preferably used for at least a portion of the insulating layer 326 that is in contact with the semiconductor layer 321 .
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 326 is preferably planarized.
- the semiconductor layer 321 is provided over the insulating layer 326 .
- the semiconductor layer 321 preferably includes a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) film having semiconductor characteristics. Details of materials that can be suitably used for the semiconductor layer 321 will be described later.
- a pair of conductive layers 325 is provided on and in contact with the semiconductor layer 321 and functions as a source electrode and a drain electrode.
- An insulating layer 328 is provided to cover the top surface and side surfaces of the pair of conductive layers 325 , the side surface of the semiconductor layer 321 , and the like, and the insulating layer 264 is provided over the insulating layer 328 .
- the insulating layer 328 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing into the semiconductor layer 321 from the insulating layer 264 or the like and oxygen from leaving the semiconductor layer 321 .
- an insulating film similar to the insulating layer 332 can be used as the insulating layer 328.
- An opening reaching the semiconductor layer 321 is provided in the insulating layer 328 and the insulating layer 264 .
- the insulating layer 323 and the conductive layer 324 are buried in contact with the side surfaces of the insulating layer 264 , the insulating layer 328 , and the conductive layer 325 and the top surface of the semiconductor layer 321 .
- the conductive layer 324 functions as a second gate electrode, and the insulating layer 323 functions as a second gate insulating layer.
- the top surface of the conductive layer 324, the top surface of the insulating layer 323, and the top surface of the insulating layer 264 are planarized so that their heights are the same or substantially the same, and the insulating layers 329 and 265 are provided to cover them. ing.
- the insulating layers 264 and 265 function as interlayer insulating layers.
- the insulating layer 329 functions as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing into the transistor 320 from the insulating layer 265 or the like.
- an insulating film similar to the insulating layers 328 and 332 can be used.
- a plug 274 electrically connected to one of the pair of conductive layers 325 is provided so as to be embedded in the insulating layers 265 , 329 , and 264 .
- the plug 274 includes a conductive layer 274a that covers the side surfaces of the openings of the insulating layers 265, the insulating layers 329, the insulating layers 264, and the insulating layer 328 and part of the top surface of the conductive layer 325, and the conductive layer 274a. It is preferable to have a conductive layer 274b in contact with the top surface. At this time, a conductive material into which hydrogen and oxygen are difficult to diffuse is preferably used for the conductive layer 274a.
- the configuration from the insulating layer 254 to the substrate 120 in the display device 100H is similar to that of the display device 100E.
- a display device 100J illustrated in FIG. 31 has a structure in which a transistor 310 in which a channel is formed over a substrate 301 and a transistor 320 including a metal oxide in a semiconductor layer in which the channel is formed are stacked.
- An insulating layer 261 is provided to cover the transistor 310 , and a conductive layer 251 is provided over the insulating layer 261 .
- An insulating layer 262 is provided to cover the conductive layer 251 , and the conductive layer 252 is provided over the insulating layer 262 .
- the conductive layers 251 and 252 each function as wirings.
- An insulating layer 263 and an insulating layer 332 are provided to cover the conductive layer 252 , and the transistor 320 is provided over the insulating layer 332 .
- An insulating layer 265 is provided to cover the transistor 320 and a capacitor 240 is provided over the insulating layer 265 . Capacitor 240 and transistor 320 are electrically connected by plug 274 .
- the transistor 320 can be used as a transistor forming a pixel circuit. Further, the transistor 310 can be used as a transistor forming a pixel circuit or a transistor forming a driver circuit (a gate line driver circuit or a source line driver circuit) for driving the pixel circuit. Further, the transistors 310 and 320 can be used as transistors included in various circuits such as an arithmetic circuit and a memory circuit.
- a display device 100K shown in FIG. 32 has a structure in which a transistor 310A and a transistor 310B each having a channel formed in a semiconductor substrate are stacked.
- the display device 100K has a structure in which a substrate 301B provided with a transistor 310B, a capacitor 240, and each light-emitting device and a substrate 301A provided with a transistor 310A are bonded together.
- an insulating layer 345 on the lower surface of the substrate 301B.
- an insulating layer 346 is preferably provided over the insulating layer 261 provided over the substrate 301A.
- the insulating layers 345 and 346 are insulating layers that function as protective layers and can suppress diffusion of impurities into the substrates 301B and 301A.
- an inorganic insulating film that can be used for the protective layer 131 or the insulating layer 332 can be used.
- the substrate 301B is provided with a plug 343 penetrating through the substrate 301B and the insulating layer 345 .
- an insulating layer 344 covering the side surface of the plug 343 .
- the insulating layer 344 is an insulating layer that functions as a protective layer and can suppress diffusion of impurities into the substrate 301B.
- an inorganic insulating film that can be used for the protective layer 131 or the insulating layer 332 can be used.
- a conductive layer 342 is provided under the insulating layer 345 on the back surface side (surface opposite to the substrate 120 side) of the substrate 301B.
- the conductive layer 342 is preferably embedded in the insulating layer 335 .
- the lower surfaces of the conductive layer 342 and the insulating layer 335 are preferably planarized.
- the conductive layer 342 is electrically connected with the plug 343 .
- the conductive layer 341 is provided on the insulating layer 346 on the substrate 301A.
- the conductive layer 341 is preferably embedded in the insulating layer 336 . It is preferable that top surfaces of the conductive layer 341 and the insulating layer 336 be planarized.
- the substrate 301A and the substrate 301B are electrically connected.
- the conductive layer 341 and the conductive layer 342 are bonded together. can be improved.
- the same conductive material is preferably used for the conductive layers 341 and 342 .
- a metal film containing an element selected from Al, Cr, Cu, Ta, Ti, Mo, and W, or a metal nitride film (titanium nitride film, molybdenum nitride film, tungsten nitride film) containing the above elements as components etc. can be used.
- copper is preferably used for the conductive layers 341 and 342 .
- a Cu—Cu (copper-copper) direct bonding technique (a technique for achieving electrical continuity by connecting Cu (copper) pads) can be applied.
- FIG. 32 shows an example in which the Cu--Cu direct bonding technique is used to bond the conductive layers 341 and 342, the present invention is not limited to this.
- the conductive layer 341 and the conductive layer 342 may be bonded via bumps 347.
- FIG. 32 shows an example in which the Cu--Cu direct bonding technique is used to bond the conductive layers 341 and 342, the present invention is not limited to this.
- the conductive layer 341 and the conductive layer 342 may be bonded via bumps 347.
- the conductive layers 341 and 342 can be electrically connected.
- the bumps 347 can be formed using a conductive material containing, for example, gold (Au), nickel (Ni), indium (In), tin (Sn), or the like. Also, for example, solder may be used as the bumps 347 . Further, an adhesive layer 348 may be provided between the insulating layer 345 and the insulating layer 346 . Further, when the bump 347 is provided, the insulating layer 335 and the insulating layer 336 may not be provided.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a display device including a light-emitting device and a pixel circuit.
- the display device can realize a full-color display device, for example, by having three types of light-emitting devices that respectively emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B) light.
- a transistor including silicon in a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed for all transistors included in a pixel circuit that drives a light-emitting device.
- silicon include monocrystalline silicon, polycrystalline silicon, and amorphous silicon.
- a transistor hereinafter also referred to as an LTPS transistor
- LTPS low-temperature polysilicon
- the LTPS transistor has high field effect mobility and good frequency characteristics.
- a circuit that needs to be driven at a high frequency (for example, a source driver circuit) can be formed over the same substrate as the display portion. This makes it possible to simplify the external circuit mounted on the display device and reduce the component cost and the mounting cost.
- At least one of the transistors included in the pixel circuit is preferably a transistor including a metal oxide (hereinafter also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) as a semiconductor in which a channel is formed (hereinafter also referred to as an OS transistor).
- OS transistors have extremely high field effect mobility compared to amorphous silicon.
- an OS transistor has extremely low source-drain leakage current (hereinafter also referred to as an off-state current) in an off state, and can retain charge accumulated in a capacitor connected in series with the transistor for a long time. is possible. Further, by using the OS transistor, power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
- an LTPS transistor By using LTPS transistors for part of the transistors included in the pixel circuit and using OS transistors for the other part, a display device with low power consumption and high driving capability can be realized.
- a structure in which an LTPS transistor and an OS transistor are combined is sometimes called an LTPO.
- an OS transistor is preferably used as a transistor that functions as a switch for controlling conduction/non-conduction between wirings, and an LTPS transistor is preferably used as a transistor that controls current.
- one of the transistors provided in the pixel circuit functions as a transistor for controlling current flowing through the light emitting device and can also be called a driving transistor.
- One of the source and drain of the driving transistor is electrically connected to the pixel electrode of the light emitting device.
- An LTPS transistor is preferably used as the driving transistor. This makes it possible to increase the current flowing through the light emitting device in the pixel circuit.
- the other transistor provided in the pixel circuit functions as a switch for controlling selection/non-selection of the pixel and can also be called a selection transistor.
- the gate of the selection transistor is electrically connected to the gate line, and one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the source line (signal line).
- An OS transistor is preferably used as the selection transistor.
- FIG. 34A shows a block diagram of the display device 10. As shown in FIG.
- the display device 10 includes a display section 11, a drive circuit section 12, a drive circuit section 13, and the like.
- the display unit 11 has a plurality of pixels 30 arranged in a matrix.
- Pixel 30 has sub-pixel 21R, sub-pixel 21G, and sub-pixel 21B.
- the sub-pixel 21R, sub-pixel 21G, and sub-pixel 21B each have a light-emitting device functioning as a display device.
- the pixel 30 is electrically connected to the wiring GL, the wiring SLR, the wiring SLG, and the wiring SLB.
- the wiring SLR, the wiring SLG, and the wiring SLB are each electrically connected to the driver circuit portion 12 .
- the wiring GL is electrically connected to the drive circuit section 13 .
- the drive circuit section 12 functions as a source line drive circuit (also referred to as a source driver), and the drive circuit section 13 functions as a gate line drive circuit (also referred to as a gate driver).
- the wiring GL functions as a gate line, and the wiring SLR, the wiring SLG, and the wiring SLB each function as a source line.
- the sub-pixel 21R has a light-emitting device that emits red light.
- Sub-pixel 21G has a light-emitting device that emits green light.
- Sub-pixel 21B has a light-emitting device that emits blue light. Accordingly, the display device 10 can perform full-color display.
- pixel 30 may have sub-pixels with light-emitting devices that exhibit other colors of light. For example, in addition to the three sub-pixels described above, the pixel 30 may have a sub-pixel having a light-emitting device that emits white light, a sub-pixel that has a light-emitting device that emits yellow light, or the like.
- the wiring GL is electrically connected to the sub-pixels 21R, 21G, and 21B arranged in the row direction (the extending direction of the wiring GL).
- the wiring SLR, the wiring SLG, and the wiring SLB are electrically connected to the sub-pixels 21R, 21G, or 21B (not shown) arranged in the column direction (the direction in which the wiring SLR and the like extend). .
- FIG. 34B shows an example of a circuit diagram of the pixel 21 that can be applied to the sub-pixel 21R, sub-pixel 21G, and sub-pixel 21B.
- Pixel 21 comprises transistor M1, transistor M2, transistor M3, capacitor C1, and light emitting device EL.
- a wiring GL and a wiring SL are electrically connected to the pixel 21 .
- the wiring SL corresponds to one of the wiring SLR, the wiring SLG, and the wiring SLB shown in FIG. 34A.
- the transistor M1 has a gate electrically connected to the wiring GL, one of its source and drain electrically connected to the wiring SL, and the other electrically connected to one electrode of the capacitor C1 and the gate of the transistor M2. be.
- the transistor M2 has one of its source and drain electrically connected to the wiring AL, and the other of its source and drain connected to one electrode of the light-emitting device EL, the other electrode of the capacitor C1, and one of the source and drain of the transistor M3. electrically connected.
- the transistor M3 has a gate electrically connected to the wiring GL and the other of its source and drain electrically connected to the wiring RL.
- the other electrode of the light emitting device EL is electrically connected to the wiring CL.
- a data potential is applied to the wiring SL.
- a selection signal is supplied to the wiring GL.
- the selection signal includes a potential that makes the transistor conductive and a potential that makes the transistor non-conductive.
- a reset potential is applied to the wiring RL.
- An anode potential is applied to the wiring AL.
- a cathode potential is applied to the wiring CL.
- the anode potential is higher than the cathode potential.
- the reset potential applied to the wiring RL can be set to a potential such that the potential difference between the reset potential and the cathode potential is smaller than the threshold voltage of the light emitting device EL.
- the reset potential can be a potential higher than the cathode potential, the same potential as the cathode potential, or a potential lower than the cathode potential.
- Transistor M1 and transistor M3 function as switches.
- the transistor M2 functions as a transistor for controlling the current flowing through the light emitting device EL.
- the transistor M1 functions as a selection transistor and the transistor M2 functions as a driving transistor.
- LTPS transistors are preferably used for all of the transistors M1 to M3.
- OS transistor for the transistors M1 and M3
- LTPS transistor for the transistor M2.
- all of the transistors M1 to M3 may be OS transistors.
- one or more of the plurality of transistors included in the driver circuit portion 12 and the plurality of transistors included in the driver circuit portion 13 can be an LTPS transistor, and the other transistors can be OS transistors.
- the transistors provided in the display portion 11 can be OS transistors
- the transistors provided in the driver circuit portion 12 and the driver circuit portion 13 can be LTPS transistors.
- the OS transistor a transistor including an oxide semiconductor for a semiconductor layer in which a channel is formed can be used.
- the semiconductor layer includes, for example, indium and M (M is gallium, aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, tin, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, one or more selected from hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, and magnesium) and zinc.
- M is preferably one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, yttrium, and tin.
- an oxide containing indium, gallium, and zinc (also referred to as IGZO) is preferably used for the semiconductor layer of the OS transistor.
- an oxide containing indium, tin, and zinc is preferably used.
- oxides containing indium, gallium, tin, and zinc are preferably used.
- a transistor including an oxide semiconductor which has a wider bandgap and a lower carrier concentration than silicon can achieve extremely low off-state current. Therefore, with the small off-state current, charge accumulated in the capacitor connected in series with the transistor can be held for a long time. Therefore, it is preferable to use a transistor including an oxide semiconductor, particularly for the transistor M1 and the transistor M3 which are connected in series to the capacitor C1.
- a transistor including an oxide semiconductor as the transistor M1 and the transistor M3
- the charge held in the capacitor C1 can be prevented from leaking through the transistor M1 or the transistor M3. Further, since the charge held in the capacitor C1 can be held for a long time, a still image can be displayed for a long time without rewriting the data of the pixel 21 .
- transistors are shown as n-channel transistors in FIG. 34B, p-channel transistors can also be used.
- each transistor included in the pixel 21 is preferably formed side by side on the same substrate.
- a transistor having a pair of gates that overlap with each other with a semiconductor layer interposed therebetween can be used.
- a structure in which the pair of gates are electrically connected to each other and supplied with the same potential is advantageous in that the on-state current of the transistor is increased and the saturation characteristics are improved.
- a potential for controlling the threshold voltage of the transistor may be applied to one of the pair of gates.
- the stability of the electrical characteristics of the transistor can be improved.
- one gate of the transistor may be electrically connected to a wiring to which a constant potential is applied, or may be electrically connected to its own source or drain.
- a pixel 21 shown in FIG. 34C is an example in which a transistor having a pair of gates is applied to the transistor M1 and the transistor M3. A pair of gates of the transistor M1 and the transistor M3 are electrically connected to each other. With such a structure, the period for writing data to the pixel 21 can be shortened.
- a pixel 21 shown in FIG. 34D is an example in which a transistor having a pair of gates is applied to the transistor M2 in addition to the transistors M1 and M3. A pair of gates of the transistor M2 are electrically connected.
- Transistor configuration example An example of a cross-sectional structure of a transistor that can be applied to the display device will be described below.
- FIG. 35A is a cross-sectional view including transistor 410.
- FIG. 35A is a cross-sectional view including transistor 410.
- a transistor 410 is a transistor provided over the substrate 401 and using polycrystalline silicon for a semiconductor layer.
- transistor 410 corresponds to transistor M2 of pixel 21 . That is, FIG. 35A is an example in which one of the source and drain of transistor 410 is electrically connected to conductive layer 431 of the light emitting device.
- the transistor 410 includes a semiconductor layer 411, an insulating layer 412, a conductive layer 413, and the like.
- the semiconductor layer 411 has a channel formation region 411i and a low resistance region 411n.
- Semiconductor layer 411 comprises silicon.
- Semiconductor layer 411 preferably comprises polycrystalline silicon.
- Part of the insulating layer 412 functions as a gate insulating layer.
- Part of the conductive layer 413 functions as a gate electrode.
- the semiconductor layer 411 can also have a structure containing a metal oxide exhibiting semiconductor characteristics (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor).
- the transistor 410 can be called an OS transistor.
- the low resistance region 411n is a region containing an impurity element.
- the transistor 410 is an n-channel transistor, phosphorus, arsenic, or the like may be added to the low-resistance region 411n.
- boron, aluminum, or the like may be added to the low resistance region 411n.
- the impurity described above may be added to the channel formation region 411i.
- An insulating layer 421 is provided over the substrate 401 .
- the semiconductor layer 411 is provided over the insulating layer 421 .
- the insulating layer 412 is provided to cover the semiconductor layer 411 and the insulating layer 421 .
- the conductive layer 413 is provided over the insulating layer 412 so as to overlap with the semiconductor layer 411 .
- An insulating layer 422 is provided to cover the conductive layer 413 and the insulating layer 412 .
- a conductive layer 414 a and a conductive layer 414 b are provided over the insulating layer 422 .
- the conductive layers 414 a and 414 b are electrically connected to the low-resistance region 411 n through openings provided in the insulating layers 422 and 412 .
- Part of the conductive layer 414a functions as one of the source and drain electrodes, and part of the conductive layer 414b functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes.
- An insulating layer 423 is provided to cover the conductive layers 414 a , 414 b , and the insulating layer 422 .
- a conductive layer 431 functioning as a pixel electrode is provided over the insulating layer 423 .
- the conductive layer 431 is provided over the insulating layer 423 and is electrically connected to the conductive layer 414 b through an opening provided in the insulating layer 423 .
- an EL layer and a common electrode can be stacked over the conductive layer 431 .
- FIG. 35B shows a transistor 410a with a pair of gate electrodes.
- a transistor 410a illustrated in FIG. 35B is mainly different from FIG. 35A in that it includes a conductive layer 415 and an insulating layer 416 .
- the conductive layer 415 is provided over the insulating layer 421 .
- An insulating layer 416 is provided to cover the conductive layer 415 and the insulating layer 421 .
- the semiconductor layer 411 is provided so that at least a channel formation region 411i overlaps with the conductive layer 415 with the insulating layer 416 interposed therebetween.
- part of the conductive layer 413 functions as a first gate electrode and part of the conductive layer 415 functions as a second gate electrode.
- part of the insulating layer 412 functions as a first gate insulating layer, and part of the insulating layer 416 functions as a second gate insulating layer.
- the conductive layer 413 and the conductive layer 413 are electrically conductive in a region (not shown) through openings provided in the insulating layers 412 and 416 .
- the layer 415 may be electrically connected.
- a conductive layer is formed through openings provided in the insulating layers 422, 412, and 416 in a region (not shown).
- the conductive layer 414a or the conductive layer 414b and the conductive layer 415 may be electrically connected.
- the transistor 410 illustrated in FIG. 35A or the transistor 410a illustrated in FIG. 35B can be used.
- the transistor 410a may be used for all the transistors forming the pixel 21
- the transistor 410 may be used for all the transistors, or the transistor 410a and the transistor 410 may be used in combination. .
- FIG. 35C A cross-sectional schematic diagram including transistor 410a and transistor 450 is shown in FIG. 35C.
- Structure Example 1 can be used for the transistor 410a. Note that although an example using the transistor 410a is shown here, a structure including the transistors 410 and 450 may be employed, or a structure including all of the transistors 410, 410a, and 450 may be employed.
- a transistor 450 is a transistor in which a metal oxide is applied to a semiconductor layer.
- the configuration shown in FIG. 35C is an example in which, for example, the transistor 450 corresponds to the transistor M1 of the pixel 21 and the transistor 410a corresponds to the transistor M2. That is, FIG. 35C shows an example in which one of the source and drain of the transistor 410a is electrically connected to the conductive layer 431.
- FIG. 35C shows an example in which one of the source and drain of the transistor 410a is electrically connected to the conductive layer 431.
- FIG. 35C shows an example in which the transistor 450 has a pair of gates.
- the transistor 450 includes a conductive layer 455, an insulating layer 422, a semiconductor layer 451, an insulating layer 452, a conductive layer 453, and the like.
- a portion of conductive layer 453 functions as a first gate of transistor 450 and a portion of conductive layer 455 functions as a second gate of transistor 450 .
- part of the insulating layer 452 functions as a first gate insulating layer of the transistor 450 and part of the insulating layer 422 functions as a second gate insulating layer of the transistor 450 .
- a conductive layer 455 is provided over the insulating layer 412 .
- An insulating layer 422 is provided to cover the conductive layer 455 .
- the semiconductor layer 451 is provided over the insulating layer 422 .
- the insulating layer 452 is provided to cover the semiconductor layer 451 and the insulating layer 422 .
- the conductive layer 453 is provided over the insulating layer 452 and has regions that overlap with the semiconductor layer 451 and the conductive layer 455 .
- An insulating layer 426 is provided to cover the insulating layer 452 and the conductive layer 453 .
- a conductive layer 454 a and a conductive layer 454 b are provided over the insulating layer 426 .
- the conductive layers 454 a and 454 b are electrically connected to the semiconductor layer 451 through openings provided in the insulating layers 426 and 452 .
- Part of the conductive layer 454a functions as one of the source and drain electrodes, and part of the conductive layer 454b functions as the other of the source and drain electrodes.
- An insulating layer 423 is provided to cover the conductive layers 454 a , 454 b , and the insulating layer 426 .
- the conductive layers 414a and 414b electrically connected to the transistor 410a are preferably formed by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 454a and 454b.
- the conductive layer 414a, the conductive layer 414b, the conductive layer 454a, and the conductive layer 454b are formed over the same surface (that is, in contact with the upper surface of the insulating layer 426) and contain the same metal element. showing.
- the conductive layers 414 a and 414 b are electrically connected to the low-resistance region 411 n through the insulating layers 426 , 452 , 422 , and openings provided in the insulating layer 412 . This is preferable because the manufacturing process can be simplified.
- the conductive layer 413 functioning as the first gate electrode of the transistor 410a and the conductive layer 455 functioning as the second gate electrode of the transistor 450 are preferably formed by processing the same conductive film.
- FIG. 35C shows a configuration in which the conductive layer 413 and the conductive layer 455 are formed on the same surface (that is, in contact with the upper surface of the insulating layer 412) and contain the same metal element. This is preferable because the manufacturing process can be simplified.
- the insulating layer 452 functioning as a first gate insulating layer of the transistor 450 covers the edge of the semiconductor layer 451.
- the transistor 450a shown in FIG. It may be processed so that the top surface shape matches or substantially matches that of the layer 453 .
- the phrase “the upper surface shapes are approximately the same” means that at least part of the contours of the stacked layers overlap.
- the upper layer and the lower layer may be processed with the same mask pattern or partially with the same mask pattern. Strictly speaking, however, the contours do not overlap, and the upper layer may be located inside the lower layer, or the upper layer may be located outside the lower layer.
- transistor 410a corresponds to the transistor M2 and is electrically connected to the pixel electrode
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the transistor 450 or the transistor 450a may correspond to the transistor M2.
- transistor 410a may correspond to transistor M1, transistor M3, or some other transistor.
- the metal oxide preferably contains at least indium or zinc. In particular, it preferably contains indium and zinc. In addition to these, aluminum, gallium, yttrium, tin and the like are preferably contained. In addition, one or more selected from boron, silicon, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, magnesium, cobalt, etc. may be contained. .
- the metal oxide is formed by chemical vapor deposition (CVD) such as sputtering, metal organic chemical vapor deposition (MOCVD), or atomic layer deposition (ALD). It can be formed by a layer deposition method or the like.
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- MOCVD metal organic chemical vapor deposition
- ALD atomic layer deposition
- Crystal structures of oxide semiconductors include amorphous (including completely amorphous), CAAC (c-axis-aligned crystalline), nc (nanocrystalline), CAC (cloud-aligned composite), single crystal, and polycrystal. (polycrystal) and the like.
- the crystal structure of the film or substrate can be evaluated using an X-ray diffraction (XRD) spectrum.
- XRD X-ray diffraction
- it can be evaluated using an XRD spectrum obtained by GIXD (Grazing-Incidence XRD) measurement.
- GIXD Gram-Incidence XRD
- the GIXD method is also called a thin film method or a Seemann-Bohlin method.
- the peak shape of the XRD spectrum is almost symmetrical.
- the peak shape of the XRD spectrum is left-right asymmetric.
- the asymmetric shape of the peaks in the XRD spectra demonstrates the presence of crystals in the film or substrate. In other words, the film or substrate cannot be said to be in an amorphous state unless the shape of the peaks in the XRD spectrum is symmetrical.
- the crystal structure of the film or substrate can be evaluated by a diffraction pattern (also referred to as a nanobeam electron diffraction pattern) observed by nano beam electron diffraction (NBED).
- a diffraction pattern also referred to as a nanobeam electron diffraction pattern
- NBED nano beam electron diffraction
- a halo is observed in the diffraction pattern of a quartz glass substrate, and it can be confirmed that the quartz glass is in an amorphous state.
- a spot-like pattern is observed instead of a halo. Therefore, it is presumed that the IGZO film deposited at room temperature is neither crystalline nor amorphous, but in an intermediate state and cannot be concluded to be in an amorphous state.
- oxide semiconductors may be classified differently from the above when their structures are focused. For example, oxide semiconductors are classified into single-crystal oxide semiconductors and non-single-crystal oxide semiconductors. Examples of non-single-crystal oxide semiconductors include the above CAAC-OS and nc-OS. Non-single-crystal oxide semiconductors include polycrystalline oxide semiconductors, amorphous-like oxide semiconductors (a-like OS), amorphous oxide semiconductors, and the like.
- CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor that includes a plurality of crystal regions, and the c-axes of the plurality of crystal regions are oriented in a specific direction. Note that the specific direction is the thickness direction of the CAAC-OS film, the normal direction to the formation surface of the CAAC-OS film, or the normal direction to the surface of the CAAC-OS film.
- a crystalline region is a region having periodicity in atomic arrangement. If the atomic arrangement is regarded as a lattice arrangement, the crystalline region is also a region with a uniform lattice arrangement.
- CAAC-OS has a region where a plurality of crystal regions are connected in the a-b plane direction, and the region may have strain.
- the strain refers to a portion where the orientation of the lattice arrangement changes between a region with a uniform lattice arrangement and another region with a uniform lattice arrangement in a region where a plurality of crystal regions are connected. That is, CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor that is c-axis oriented and has no obvious orientation in the ab plane direction.
- each of the plurality of crystal regions is composed of one or a plurality of minute crystals (crystals having a maximum diameter of less than 10 nm).
- the maximum diameter of the crystalline region is less than 10 nm.
- the size of the crystal region may be about several tens of nanometers.
- CAAC-OS contains indium (In) and oxygen.
- a tendency to have a layered crystal structure also referred to as a layered structure in which a layer (hereinafter referred to as an In layer) and a layer containing the element M, zinc (Zn), and oxygen (hereinafter referred to as a (M, Zn) layer) are stacked.
- the (M, Zn) layer may contain indium.
- the In layer contains the element M.
- the In layer may contain Zn.
- the layered structure is observed as a lattice image in, for example, a high-resolution TEM (Transmission Electron Microscope) image.
- a plurality of bright points are observed in the electron beam diffraction pattern of the CAAC-OS film.
- a certain spot and another spot are observed at point-symmetrical positions with respect to the spot of the incident electron beam that has passed through the sample (also referred to as a direct spot) as the center of symmetry.
- the lattice arrangement in the crystal region is basically a hexagonal lattice, but the unit lattice is not always regular hexagon and may be non-regular hexagon. Moreover, the distortion may have a lattice arrangement such as a pentagon or a heptagon. Note that in CAAC-OS, no clear crystal grain boundary can be observed even near the strain. That is, it can be seen that the distortion of the lattice arrangement suppresses the formation of grain boundaries. This is because the CAAC-OS can tolerate strain due to the fact that the arrangement of oxygen atoms is not dense in the ab plane direction and the bond distance between atoms changes due to the substitution of metal atoms. it is conceivable that.
- a crystal structure in which clear grain boundaries are confirmed is called a so-called polycrystal.
- a grain boundary becomes a recombination center, traps carriers, and is highly likely to cause a decrease in on-current of a transistor, a decrease in field-effect mobility, and the like. Therefore, a CAAC-OS in which no clear grain boundaries are observed is one of crystalline oxides having a crystal structure suitable for a semiconductor layer of a transistor.
- a structure containing Zn is preferable for forming a CAAC-OS.
- In--Zn oxide and In--Ga--Zn oxide are preferable because they can suppress the generation of grain boundaries more than In oxide.
- a CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor with high crystallinity and no clear grain boundaries. Therefore, it can be said that the decrease in electron mobility due to grain boundaries is less likely to occur in CAAC-OS.
- a CAAC-OS can be said to be an oxide semiconductor with few impurities and defects (such as oxygen vacancies). Therefore, an oxide semiconductor including CAAC-OS has stable physical properties. Therefore, an oxide semiconductor including CAAC-OS is resistant to heat and has high reliability.
- CAAC-OS is also stable against high temperatures (so-called thermal budget) in the manufacturing process. Therefore, the use of the CAAC-OS for the OS transistor makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the manufacturing process.
- nc-OS has periodic atomic arrangement in a minute region (eg, a region of 1 nm to 10 nm, particularly a region of 1 nm to 3 nm).
- the nc-OS has minute crystals.
- the size of the minute crystal is, for example, 1 nm or more and 10 nm or less, particularly 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less, the minute crystal is also called a nanocrystal.
- nc-OS does not show regularity in crystal orientation between different nanocrystals. Therefore, no orientation is observed in the entire film.
- an nc-OS may be indistinguishable from an a-like OS or an amorphous oxide semiconductor depending on the analysis method.
- an nc-OS film is subjected to structural analysis using an XRD apparatus, out-of-plane XRD measurement using ⁇ /2 ⁇ scanning does not detect a peak indicating crystallinity.
- an nc-OS film is subjected to electron beam diffraction (also referred to as selected area electron beam diffraction) using an electron beam with a probe diameter larger than that of nanocrystals (for example, 50 nm or more), a diffraction pattern such as a halo pattern is obtained. is observed.
- an nc-OS film is subjected to electron diffraction (also referred to as nanobeam electron diffraction) using an electron beam with a probe diameter close to or smaller than the size of a nanocrystal (for example, 1 nm or more and 30 nm or less)
- an electron beam diffraction pattern is obtained in which a plurality of spots are observed within a ring-shaped area centered on the direct spot.
- An a-like OS is an oxide semiconductor having a structure between an nc-OS and an amorphous oxide semiconductor.
- An a-like OS has void or low density regions. That is, the a-like OS has lower crystallinity than the nc-OS and CAAC-OS. In addition, the a-like OS has a higher hydrogen concentration in the film than the nc-OS and the CAAC-OS.
- CAC-OS relates to material composition.
- CAC-OS is, for example, one structure of a material in which elements constituting a metal oxide are unevenly distributed with a size of 0.5 nm or more and 10 nm or less, preferably 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less, or in the vicinity thereof.
- the metal oxide one or more metal elements are unevenly distributed, and the region having the metal element has a size of 0.5 nm or more and 10 nm or less, preferably 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less, or a size in the vicinity thereof.
- the mixed state is also called mosaic or patch.
- CAC-OS is a structure in which the material is separated into a first region and a second region to form a mosaic shape, and the first region is distributed in the film (hereinafter, also referred to as a cloud shape). ). That is, CAC-OS is a composite metal oxide in which the first region and the second region are mixed.
- the atomic ratios of In, Ga, and Zn to the metal elements constituting the CAC-OS in the In—Ga—Zn oxide are represented by [In], [Ga], and [Zn], respectively.
- the first region is a region where [In] is larger than [In] in the composition of the CAC-OS.
- the second region is a region in which [Ga] is larger than [Ga] in the CAC-OS composition.
- the first region is a region in which [In] is larger than [In] in the second region and [Ga] is smaller than [Ga] in the second region.
- the second region is a region in which [Ga] is larger than [Ga] in the first region and [In] is smaller than [In] in the first region.
- the first region is a region containing indium oxide, indium zinc oxide, or the like as a main component.
- the second region is a region containing gallium oxide, gallium zinc oxide, or the like as a main component. That is, the first region can be rephrased as a region containing In as a main component. Also, the second region can be rephrased as a region containing Ga as a main component.
- the CAC-OS in the In—Ga—Zn oxide means a region containing Ga as a main component and a region containing In as a main component in a material structure containing In, Ga, Zn, and O. Each region is a mosaic, and refers to a configuration in which these regions exist randomly. Therefore, CAC-OS is presumed to have a structure in which metal elements are unevenly distributed.
- a CAC-OS can be formed, for example, by a sputtering method under conditions in which the substrate is not heated.
- a sputtering method one or more selected from an inert gas (typically argon), an oxygen gas, and a nitrogen gas may be used as a deposition gas. good.
- an inert gas typically argon
- oxygen gas typically argon
- a nitrogen gas may be used as a deposition gas. good.
- the lower the flow rate ratio of the oxygen gas to the total flow rate of the film formation gas during film formation, the better. is preferably 0% or more and 10% or less.
- an EDX mapping obtained using energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy shows that a region containing In as a main component It can be confirmed that the (first region) and the region (second region) containing Ga as the main component are unevenly distributed and have a mixed structure.
- the first region is a region with higher conductivity than the second region. That is, when carriers flow through the first region, conductivity as a metal oxide is developed. Therefore, by distributing the first region in the form of a cloud in the metal oxide, a high field effect mobility ( ⁇ ) can be realized.
- the second region is a region with higher insulation than the first region.
- the leakage current can be suppressed by distributing the second region in the metal oxide.
- CAC-OS when used for a transistor, the conductivity caused by the first region and the insulation caused by the second region act in a complementary manner to provide a switching function (turning ON/OFF). functions) can be given to the CAC-OS.
- a part of the material has a conductive function
- a part of the material has an insulating function
- the whole material has a semiconductor function.
- CAC-OS is most suitable for various semiconductor devices including display devices.
- Oxide semiconductors have various structures and each has different characteristics.
- An oxide semiconductor of one embodiment of the present invention includes two or more of an amorphous oxide semiconductor, a polycrystalline oxide semiconductor, an a-like OS, a CAC-OS, an nc-OS, and a CAAC-OS. may
- an oxide semiconductor with low carrier concentration is preferably used for a transistor.
- the carrier concentration of the oxide semiconductor is 1 ⁇ 10 17 cm ⁇ 3 or less, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 13 cm ⁇ 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 11 cm ⁇ 3 or less. 3 or less, more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 10 cm ⁇ 3 and 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 cm ⁇ 3 or more.
- the impurity concentration in the oxide semiconductor film may be lowered to lower the defect level density.
- a low impurity concentration and a low defect level density are referred to as high-purity intrinsic or substantially high-purity intrinsic.
- an oxide semiconductor with a low carrier concentration is sometimes referred to as a highly purified intrinsic or substantially highly purified intrinsic oxide semiconductor.
- the trap level density may also be low.
- the charge trapped in the trap level of the oxide semiconductor takes a long time to disappear and may behave like a fixed charge. Therefore, a transistor whose channel formation region is formed in an oxide semiconductor with a high trap level density might have unstable electrical characteristics.
- Impurities include hydrogen, nitrogen, alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, iron, nickel, silicon, and the like.
- the concentration of silicon or carbon in the oxide semiconductor and the concentration of silicon or carbon in the vicinity of the interface with the oxide semiconductor are 2 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 2 ⁇ 10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the concentration of alkali metal or alkaline earth metal in the oxide semiconductor obtained by SIMS is set to 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 2 ⁇ 10 16 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the nitrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor obtained by SIMS is less than 5 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 , preferably 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less. , more preferably 5 ⁇ 10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the oxide semiconductor reacts with oxygen that bonds to a metal atom to form water, which may cause oxygen vacancies.
- oxygen vacancies When hydrogen enters the oxygen vacancies, electrons, which are carriers, may be generated.
- part of hydrogen may bond with oxygen that bonds with a metal atom to generate an electron, which is a carrier. Therefore, a transistor including an oxide semiconductor containing hydrogen is likely to have normally-on characteristics. Therefore, hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor is preferably reduced as much as possible.
- the hydrogen concentration obtained by SIMS is less than 1 ⁇ 10 20 atoms/cm 3 , preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm. Less than 3 , more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 .
- the electronic devices of this embodiment each include the display device of one embodiment of the present invention in a display portion.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can easily have high definition and high resolution. Therefore, it can be used for display portions of various electronic devices.
- Examples of electronic devices include televisions, desktop or notebook personal computers, monitors for computers, digital signage, large game machines such as pachinko machines, and other electronic devices with relatively large screens. Examples include cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, mobile game machines, mobile information terminals, and sound reproducing devices.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have high definition, it can be suitably used for an electronic device having a relatively small display portion.
- electronic devices include wristwatch-type and bracelet-type information terminals (wearable devices), VR devices such as head-mounted displays, glasses-type AR devices, and MR devices.
- wearable devices include wristwatch-type and bracelet-type information terminals (wearable devices), VR devices such as head-mounted displays, glasses-type AR devices, and MR devices.
- a wearable device that can be attached to a part is exemplified.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes HD (1280 ⁇ 720 pixels), FHD (1920 ⁇ 1080 pixels), WQHD (2560 ⁇ 1440 pixels), WQXGA (2560 ⁇ 1600 pixels), 4K (2560 ⁇ 1600 pixels), 3840 ⁇ 2160) and 8K (7680 ⁇ 4320 pixels).
- the resolution it is preferable to set the resolution to 4K, 8K, or higher.
- the pixel density (definition) of the display device of one embodiment of the present invention is preferably 100 ppi or more, preferably 300 ppi or more, more preferably 500 ppi or more, more preferably 1000 ppi or more, more preferably 2000 ppi or more, and 3000 ppi or more.
- the display device can support various screen ratios such as 1:1 (square), 4:3, 16:9, 16:10.
- the electronic device of this embodiment includes sensors (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of revolutions, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage , power, radiation, flow, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared).
- the electronic device of this embodiment can have various functions. For example, functions to display various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display, touch panel functions, functions to display calendars, dates or times, functions to execute various software (programs), wireless communication function, a function of reading a program or data recorded on a recording medium, and the like.
- FIGS. 36A, 36B, 37A, and 37B An example of a wearable device that can be worn on the head will be described with reference to FIGS. 36A, 36B, 37A, and 37B.
- These wearable devices have one or both of the function of displaying AR content and the function of displaying VR content.
- these wearable devices may have a function of displaying SR or MR content in addition to AR and VR.
- the electronic device has a function of displaying content such as AR, VR, SR, and MR, it is possible to enhance the immersive feeling of the user.
- Electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 36A and electronic device 700B shown in FIG. It has a control section (not shown), an imaging section (not shown), a pair of optical members 753 , a frame 757 and a pair of nose pads 758 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 751 . Therefore, the electronic device can display images with extremely high definition.
- Each of the electronic devices 700A and 700B can project an image displayed on the display panel 751 onto the display area 756 of the optical member 753 . Since the optical member 753 has translucency, the user can see the image displayed in the display area superimposed on the transmitted image visually recognized through the optical member 753 . Therefore, the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B are electronic devices capable of AR display.
- the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B may be provided with a camera capable of capturing an image of the front as an imaging unit. Further, the electronic devices 700A and 700B each include an acceleration sensor such as a gyro sensor to detect the orientation of the user's head and display an image corresponding to the orientation in the display area 756. You can also
- the communication unit has a wireless communication device, and can supply a video signal or the like by the wireless communication device.
- a connector to which a cable to which a video signal and a power supply potential are supplied may be provided.
- the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B are provided with batteries, and can be charged wirelessly and/or wiredly.
- the housing 721 may be provided with a touch sensor module.
- the touch sensor module has a function of detecting that the outer surface of the housing 721 is touched.
- the touch sensor module can detect a user's tap operation or slide operation and execute various processes. For example, it is possible to perform processing such as pausing or resuming a moving image by a tap operation, and fast-forward or fast-reverse processing can be performed by a slide operation. Further, by providing a touch sensor module for each of the two housings 721, the range of operations can be expanded.
- Various touch sensors can be applied as the touch sensor module.
- various methods such as a capacitance method, a resistive film method, an infrared method, an electromagnetic induction method, a surface acoustic wave method, and an optical method can be adopted.
- a photoelectric conversion device (also referred to as a photoelectric conversion element) can be used as a light receiving device (also referred to as a light receiving element).
- a light receiving device also referred to as a light receiving element.
- an inorganic semiconductor and an organic semiconductor can be used for the active layer of the photoelectric conversion device.
- Electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 37A and electronic device 800B shown in FIG. It has a pair of imaging units 825 and a pair of lenses 832 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 820 . Therefore, the electronic device can display images with extremely high definition. This allows the user to feel a high sense of immersion.
- the display unit 820 is provided inside the housing 821 at a position where it can be viewed through the lens 832 . By displaying different images on the pair of display portions 820, three-dimensional display using parallax can be performed.
- Each of the electronic device 800A and the electronic device 800B can be said to be an electronic device for VR.
- a user wearing electronic device 800 ⁇ /b>A or electronic device 800 ⁇ /b>B can view an image displayed on display unit 820 through lens 832 .
- the electronic device 800A and the electronic device 800B each have a mechanism that can adjust the left and right positions of the lens 832 and the display unit 820 so that they are optimally positioned according to the position of the user's eyes. preferably. Further, it is preferable to have a mechanism for adjusting focus by changing the distance between the lens 832 and the display portion 820 .
- Mounting portion 823 allows the user to mount electronic device 800A or electronic device 800B on the head.
- the shape is illustrated as a temple of spectacles (also referred to as a joint, a temple, etc.), but the shape is not limited to this.
- the mounting portion 823 may be worn by the user, and may be, for example, a helmet-type or band-type shape.
- the imaging unit 825 has a function of acquiring external information. Data acquired by the imaging unit 825 can be output to the display unit 820 . An image sensor can be used for the imaging unit 825 . Also, a plurality of cameras may be provided so as to be able to deal with a plurality of angles of view such as telephoto and wide angle.
- a distance measuring sensor capable of measuring the distance to an object
- the imaging unit 825 is one aspect of the detection unit.
- the detection unit for example, an image sensor or a distance image sensor such as LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) can be used.
- LIDAR Light Detection and Ranging
- the electronic device 800A may have a vibration mechanism that functions as bone conduction earphones.
- a vibration mechanism that functions as bone conduction earphones.
- one or more of the display portion 820, the housing 821, and the mounting portion 823 can be provided with the vibration mechanism.
- the user can enjoy video and audio simply by wearing the electronic device 800A without the need for separate audio equipment such as headphones, earphones, or speakers.
- Each of the electronic device 800A and the electronic device 800B may have an input terminal.
- the input terminal can be connected to a cable that supplies a video signal from a video output device or the like, power for charging a battery provided in the electronic device, or the like.
- An electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a function of wirelessly communicating with the earphone 750 .
- Earphone 750 has a communication unit (not shown) and has a wireless communication function.
- the earphone 750 can receive information (eg, audio data) from the electronic device by wireless communication function.
- electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 36A has a function of transmitting information to earphone 750 by a wireless communication function.
- electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 37A has a function of transmitting information to earphone 750 by a wireless communication function.
- the electronic device may have an earphone section.
- Electronic device 700B shown in FIG. 36B has earphone section 727 .
- the earphone section 727 and the control section can be configured to be wired to each other.
- a part of the wiring connecting the earphone section 727 and the control section may be arranged inside the housing 721 or the mounting section 723 .
- electronic device 800B shown in FIG. 37B has earphone section 827.
- the earphone unit 827 and the control unit 824 can be configured to be wired to each other.
- a part of the wiring connecting the earphone section 827 and the control section 824 may be arranged inside the housing 821 or the mounting section 823 .
- the earphone section 827 and the mounting section 823 may have magnets. Accordingly, the earphone section 827 can be fixed to the mounting section 823 by magnetic force, which is preferable because it facilitates storage.
- the electronic device may have an audio output terminal to which earphones, headphones, or the like can be connected. Also, the electronic device may have one or both of an audio input terminal and an audio input mechanism.
- the voice input mechanism for example, a sound collecting device such as a microphone can be used.
- the electronic device may function as a so-called headset.
- the electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention includes both glasses type (electronic device 700A, electronic device 700B, etc.) and goggle type (electronic device 800A, electronic device 800B, etc.). preferred.
- the electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention can transmit information to the earphone by wire or wirelessly.
- An electronic device 6500 illustrated in FIG. 38A is a mobile information terminal that can be used as a smart phone.
- An electronic device 6500 includes a housing 6501, a display portion 6502, a power button 6503, a button 6504, a speaker 6505, a microphone 6506, a camera 6507, a light source 6508, and the like.
- a display portion 6502 has a touch panel function.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 6502 .
- FIG. 38B is a schematic cross-sectional view including the end of housing 6501 on the microphone 6506 side.
- a light-transmitting protective member 6510 is provided on the display surface side of the housing 6501, and a display panel 6511, an optical member 6512, a touch sensor panel 6513, and a printer are placed in a space surrounded by the housing 6501 and the protective member 6510.
- a substrate 6517, a battery 6518, and the like are arranged.
- a display panel 6511, an optical member 6512, and a touch sensor panel 6513 are fixed to the protective member 6510 with an adhesive layer (not shown).
- a portion of the display panel 6511 is folded back in a region outside the display portion 6502, and the FPC 6515 is connected to the folded portion.
- An IC6516 is mounted on the FPC6515.
- the FPC 6515 is connected to terminals provided on the printed circuit board 6517 .
- the flexible display of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 6511 . Therefore, an extremely lightweight electronic device can be realized. In addition, since the display panel 6511 is extremely thin, the thickness of the electronic device can be reduced and the large-capacity battery 6518 can be mounted. In addition, by folding back part of the display panel 6511 and arranging a connection portion with the FPC 6515 on the back side of the pixel portion, an electronic device with a narrow frame can be realized.
- FIG. 39A shows an example of a television device.
- a television set 7100 has a display portion 7000 incorporated in a housing 7101 .
- a configuration in which a housing 7101 is supported by a stand 7103 is shown.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000 .
- the operation of the television apparatus 7100 shown in FIG. 39A can be performed using operation switches provided in the housing 7101 and a separate remote controller 7111 .
- the display portion 7000 may be provided with a touch sensor, and the television device 7100 may be operated by touching the display portion 7000 with a finger or the like.
- the remote controller 7111 may have a display section for displaying information output from the remote controller 7111 .
- a channel and a volume can be operated with operation keys or a touch panel provided in the remote controller 7111 , and an image displayed on the display portion 7000 can be operated.
- the television device 7100 is configured to include a receiver, a modem, and the like.
- the receiver can receive general television broadcasts. Also, by connecting to a wired or wireless communication network via a modem, one-way (from the sender to the receiver) or two-way (between the sender and the receiver, or between the receivers, etc.) information communication. is also possible.
- FIG. 39B shows an example of a notebook personal computer.
- a notebook personal computer 7200 has a housing 7211, a keyboard 7212, a pointing device 7213, an external connection port 7214, and the like.
- the display portion 7000 is incorporated in the housing 7211 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000 .
- FIG. 39C An example of digital signage is shown in FIG. 39C and FIG. 39D.
- a digital signage 7300 illustrated in FIG. 39C includes a housing 7301, a display portion 7000, speakers 7303, and the like. Furthermore, it can have an LED lamp, an operation key (including a power switch or an operation switch), connection terminals, various sensors, a microphone, and the like.
- FIG. 39D is a digital signage 7400 mounted on a cylindrical post 7401.
- FIG. A digital signage 7400 has a display section 7000 provided along the curved surface of a pillar 7401 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000 in FIGS. 39C and 39D.
- the display portion 7000 As the display portion 7000 is wider, the amount of information that can be provided at one time can be increased. In addition, the wider the display unit 7000, the more conspicuous it is, and the more effective the advertisement can be, for example.
- a touch panel By applying a touch panel to the display portion 7000, not only an image or a moving image can be displayed on the display portion 7000 but also the user can intuitively operate the display portion 7000, which is preferable. Further, when used for providing information such as route information or traffic information, usability can be enhanced by intuitive operation.
- the digital signage 7300 or digital signage 7400 is preferably capable of cooperating with an information terminal 7311 or information terminal 7411 such as a smartphone possessed by the user through wireless communication.
- advertisement information displayed on the display unit 7000 can be displayed on the screen of the information terminal 7311 or the information terminal 7411 .
- display on the display portion 7000 can be switched.
- the digital signage 7300 or the digital signage 7400 can execute a game using the screen of the information terminal 7311 or 7411 as an operation means (controller). This allows an unspecified number of users to simultaneously participate in and enjoy the game.
- the electronic device shown in FIGS. 40A to 40G includes a housing 9000, a display unit 9001, a speaker 9003, operation keys 9005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), connection terminals 9006, sensors 9007 (force, displacement, position, speed , acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substances, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell, or infrared rays function), a microphone 9008, and the like.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 9001 in FIGS. 40A to 40G.
- the electronic devices shown in FIGS. 40A to 40G have various functions. For example, a function to display various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a calendar, a function to display the date or time, a function to control processing by various software (programs), It can have a wireless communication function, a function of reading and processing programs or data recorded on a recording medium, and the like. Note that the functions of the electronic device are not limited to these, and can have various functions.
- the electronic device may have a plurality of display units.
- the electronic device is equipped with a camera, etc., and has the function of capturing still images or moving images and storing them in a recording medium (external or built into the camera), or the function of displaying the captured image on the display unit, etc. good.
- FIGS. 40A to 40G Details of the electronic device shown in FIGS. 40A to 40G are described below.
- FIG. 40A is a perspective view showing a mobile information terminal 9101.
- the mobile information terminal 9101 can be used as a smart phone, for example.
- the portable information terminal 9101 may be provided with a speaker 9003, a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007, and the like.
- the mobile information terminal 9101 can display text and image information on its multiple surfaces.
- FIG. 40A shows an example in which three icons 9050 are displayed.
- Information 9051 indicated by a dashed rectangle can also be displayed on another surface of the display portion 9001 . Examples of the information 9051 include notification of incoming e-mail, SNS, telephone call, title of e-mail or SNS, sender name, date and time, remaining battery power, radio wave intensity, and the like.
- an icon 9050 or the like may be displayed at the position where the information 9051 is displayed.
- FIG. 40B is a perspective view showing a mobile information terminal 9102.
- the portable information terminal 9102 has a function of displaying information on three or more sides of the display portion 9001 .
- information 9052, information 9053, and information 9054 are displayed on different surfaces.
- the user can confirm the information 9053 displayed at a position where the mobile information terminal 9102 can be viewed from above the mobile information terminal 9102 while the mobile information terminal 9102 is stored in the chest pocket of the clothes.
- the user can check the display without taking out the portable information terminal 9102 from the pocket, and can determine, for example, whether to receive a call.
- FIG. 40C is a perspective view showing the tablet terminal 9103.
- the tablet terminal 9103 can execute various applications such as mobile phone, e-mail, reading and creating text, playing music, Internet communication, and computer games.
- the tablet terminal 9103 has a display portion 9001, a camera 9002, a microphone 9008, and a speaker 9003 on the front of the housing 9000, operation keys 9005 as operation buttons on the left side of the housing 9000, and connection terminals on the bottom. 9006.
- FIG. 40D is a perspective view showing a wristwatch-type personal digital assistant 9200.
- the mobile information terminal 9200 can be used as a smart watch (registered trademark), for example.
- the display portion 9001 has a curved display surface, and display can be performed along the curved display surface.
- the mobile information terminal 9200 can also make hands-free calls by mutual communication with a headset capable of wireless communication, for example.
- the portable information terminal 9200 can transmit data to and from another information terminal through the connection terminal 9006, and can be charged. Note that the charging operation may be performed by wireless power supply.
- FIGS. 40E to 40G are perspective views showing a foldable personal digital assistant 9201.
- FIG. 40E is a state in which the portable information terminal 9201 is unfolded
- FIG. 40G is a state in which it is folded
- FIG. 40F is a perspective view in the middle of changing from one of FIGS. 40E and 40G to the other.
- the portable information terminal 9201 has excellent portability in the folded state, and has excellent display visibility due to a seamless wide display area in the unfolded state.
- a display portion 9001 included in the portable information terminal 9201 is supported by three housings 9000 connected by hinges 9055 .
- the display portion 9001 can be bent with a curvature radius of 0.1 mm or more and 150 mm or less.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Geometry (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
Abstract
Description
図2A乃至図2Fは、画素の一例を示す上面図である。
図3A乃至図3Fは、画素の一例を示す上面図である。
図4A乃至図4Hは、画素の一例を示す上面図である。
図5A乃至図5Dは、画素の一例を示す上面図である。
図6A乃至図6Dは、画素の一例を示す上面図である。図6E乃至図6Gは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図7A乃至図7Fは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す上面図である。
図8A乃至図8Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図9A乃至図9Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図10A乃至図10Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図11A乃至図11Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図12A乃至図12Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図13A乃至図13Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図14A乃至図14Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図15A乃至図15Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図16は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図17A及び図17Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図18A乃至図18Cは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図19A及び図19Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図20A及び図20Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図21A及び図21Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図22A及び図22Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図23は、表示装置の一例を示す斜視図である。
図24Aは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。図24B及び図24Cは、トランジスタの一例を示す断面図である。
図25A乃至図25Dは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図26は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図27は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図28A及び図28Bは、表示モジュールの一例を示す斜視図である。
図29A乃至図29Cは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図30は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図31は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図32は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図33は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図34Aは、表示装置の一例を示すブロック図である。図34B乃至図34Dは、画素回路の一例を示す図である。
図35A乃至図35Dは、トランジスタの一例を示す図である。
図36A及び図36Bは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図37A及び図37Bは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図38A及び図38Bは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図39A乃至図39Dは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図40A乃至図40Gは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置とその作製方法について図1乃至図17を用いて説明する。
図1A乃至図1Cに、本発明の一態様の表示装置を示す。
次に、図1Aとは異なる画素レイアウトについて説明する。副画素の配列に特に限定はなく、様々な方法を適用することができる。副画素の配列としては、例えば、ストライプ配列、Sストライプ配列、マトリクス配列、デルタ配列、ベイヤー配列、ペンタイル配列などが挙げられる。
次に、図7乃至図14を用いて表示装置の作製方法例を説明する。図7A乃至図7Fは、表示装置の作製方法を示す上面図である。図8A乃至図8Cには、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間の断面図と、Y1−Y2間の断面図と、を並べて示す。図9乃至図14についても、図8と同様である。
次に、図15及び図16を用いて表示装置の作製方法例を説明する。図15A乃至図15C及び図16には、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間の断面図と、Y1−Y2間の断面図と、を並べて示す。
次に、図17を用いて表示装置の作製方法例を説明する。図17A及び図17Bには、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間の断面図と、Y1−Y2間の断面図と、を並べて示す。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置に適用することができる発光デバイスの構成例について図18乃至図22を用いて説明する。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置について図23乃至図27を用いて説明する。
図23に、表示装置100Aの斜視図を示し、図24Aに、表示装置100Aの断面図を示す。
図25Aに示す表示装置100Bは、白色発光の発光デバイスとカラーフィルタを組み合わせた、ボトムエミッション型の表示装置である点で、表示装置100Aと主に相違する。なお、以降の表示装置の説明においては、先に説明した表示装置と同様の部分については説明を省略することがある。
図26に示す表示装置100Cは、タンデム構造の発光デバイスを用いている点で、表示装置100Aと主に相違する。
図27に示す表示装置100Dは、受光デバイス130dを有する点で、表示装置100Aと主に相違する。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置について図28乃至図33を用いて説明する。
図28Aに、表示モジュール280の斜視図を示す。表示モジュール280は、表示装置100Eと、FPC290と、を有する。なお、表示モジュール280が有する表示装置は表示装置100Eに限られず、後述する表示装置100F乃至表示装置100Lのいずれかであってもよい。
図29Aに示す表示装置100Eは、基板301、発光デバイス130a、130b、130c、容量240、及び、トランジスタ310を有する。
図29Bに示す表示装置100Fは、保護層131上に着色層132R、132G、132Bが設けられている例である。なお、以降の表示装置の説明においては、先に説明した表示装置と同様の部分については説明を省略することがある。
図29Cに示す表示装置100Gは、着色層132R、132G、132Bが設けられた基板120が、樹脂層122によって、保護層131上に貼り合わされている例である。
図30に示す表示装置100Hは、トランジスタの構成が異なる点で、表示装置100Eと主に相違する。
図31に示す表示装置100Jは、基板301にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ310と、チャネルが形成される半導体層に金属酸化物を含むトランジスタ320とが積層された構成を有する。
図32に示す表示装置100Kは、それぞれ半導体基板にチャネルが形成されるトランジスタ310Aと、トランジスタ310Bとが積層された構成を有する。
図32では、導電層341と導電層342の接合にCu−Cu直接接合技術を用いる例について示したが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。図33に示す表示装置100Lのように、導電層341と導電層342を、バンプ347を介して接合する構成にしてもよい。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置に適用することのできるトランジスタの構成例について説明する。特に、チャネルが形成される半導体にシリコンを含むトランジスタを用いる場合について説明する。
図34Aに、表示装置10のブロック図を示す。表示装置10は、表示部11、駆動回路部12、駆動回路部13などを有する。
図34Bに、上記副画素21R、副画素21G、及び副画素21Bに適用することのできる画素21の回路図の一例を示す。画素21は、トランジスタM1、トランジスタM2、トランジスタM3、容量C1、及び発光デバイスELを有する。また、画素21には、配線GL及び配線SLが電気的に接続される。配線SLは、図34Aで示した配線SLR、配線SLG、及び配線SLBのうちのいずれかに対応する。
以下では、上記表示装置に適用することのできるトランジスタの断面構成例について説明する。
図35Aは、トランジスタ410を含む断面図である。
図35Bには、一対のゲート電極を有するトランジスタ410aを示す。図35Bに示すトランジスタ410aは、導電層415、及び絶縁層416を有する点で、図35Aと主に相違している。
以下では、半導体層にシリコンが適用されたトランジスタと、半導体層に金属酸化物が適用されたトランジスタの両方を有する構成の例について説明する。
本実施の形態では、上記の実施の形態で説明したOSトランジスタに用いることができる金属酸化物(酸化物半導体ともいう)について説明する。
酸化物半導体の結晶構造としては、アモルファス(completely amorphousを含む)、CAAC(c−axis−aligned crystalline)、nc(nanocrystalline)、CAC(cloud−aligned composite)、単結晶(single crystal)、及び多結晶(polycrystal)等が挙げられる。
なお、酸化物半導体は、構造に着目した場合、上記とは異なる分類となる場合がある。例えば、酸化物半導体は、単結晶酸化物半導体と、それ以外の非単結晶酸化物半導体と、に分けられる。非単結晶酸化物半導体としては、例えば、上述のCAAC−OS、及びnc−OSがある。また、非単結晶酸化物半導体には、多結晶酸化物半導体、擬似非晶質酸化物半導体(a−like OS:amorphous−like oxide semiconductor)、非晶質酸化物半導体、などが含まれる。
CAAC−OSは、複数の結晶領域を有し、当該複数の結晶領域はc軸が特定の方向に配向している酸化物半導体である。なお、特定の方向とは、CAAC−OS膜の厚さ方向、CAAC−OS膜の被形成面の法線方向、またはCAAC−OS膜の表面の法線方向である。また、結晶領域とは、原子配列に周期性を有する領域である。なお、原子配列を格子配列とみなすと、結晶領域とは、格子配列の揃った領域でもある。さらに、CAAC−OSは、a−b面方向において複数の結晶領域が連結する領域を有し、当該領域は歪みを有する場合がある。なお、歪みとは、複数の結晶領域が連結する領域において、格子配列の揃った領域と、別の格子配列の揃った領域と、の間で格子配列の向きが変化している箇所を指す。つまり、CAAC−OSは、c軸配向し、a−b面方向には明らかな配向をしていない酸化物半導体である。
nc−OSは、微小な領域(例えば、1nm以上10nm以下の領域、特に1nm以上3nm以下の領域)において原子配列に周期性を有する。別言すると、nc−OSは、微小な結晶を有する。なお、当該微小な結晶の大きさは、例えば、1nm以上10nm以下、特に1nm以上3nm以下であることから、当該微小な結晶をナノ結晶ともいう。また、nc−OSは、異なるナノ結晶間で結晶方位に規則性が見られない。そのため、膜全体で配向性が見られない。従って、nc−OSは、分析方法によっては、a−like OSまたは非晶質酸化物半導体と区別が付かない場合がある。例えば、nc−OS膜に対し、XRD装置を用いて構造解析を行うと、θ/2θスキャンを用いたOut−of−plane XRD測定では、結晶性を示すピークが検出されない。また、nc−OS膜に対し、ナノ結晶よりも大きいプローブ径(例えば50nm以上)の電子線を用いる電子線回折(制限視野電子線回折ともいう。)を行うと、ハローパターンのような回折パターンが観測される。一方、nc−OS膜に対し、ナノ結晶の大きさと近いかナノ結晶より小さいプローブ径(例えば1nm以上30nm以下)の電子線を用いる電子線回折(ナノビーム電子線回折ともいう。)を行うと、ダイレクトスポットを中心とするリング状の領域内に複数のスポットが観測される電子線回折パターンが取得される場合がある。
a−like OSは、nc−OSと非晶質酸化物半導体との間の構造を有する酸化物半導体である。a−like OSは、鬆または低密度領域を有する。即ち、a−like OSは、nc−OS及びCAAC−OSと比べて、結晶性が低い。また、a−like OSは、nc−OS及びCAAC−OSと比べて、膜中の水素濃度が高い。
次に、上述のCAC−OSの詳細について、説明を行う。なお、CAC−OSは材料構成に関する。
CAC−OSとは、例えば、金属酸化物を構成する元素が、0.5nm以上10nm以下、好ましくは、1nm以上3nm以下、またはその近傍のサイズで偏在した材料の一構成である。なお、以下では、金属酸化物において、一つまたは複数の金属元素が偏在し、該金属元素を有する領域が、0.5nm以上10nm以下、好ましくは、1nm以上3nm以下、またはその近傍のサイズで混合した状態をモザイク状、またはパッチ状ともいう。
続いて、上記酸化物半導体をトランジスタに用いる場合について説明する。
ここで、酸化物半導体中における各不純物の影響について説明する。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の電子機器について、図36乃至図40を用いて説明する。
Claims (20)
- 第1の発光デバイス及び第2の発光デバイスを有し、
前記第1の発光デバイスは、第1の導電層と、前記第1の導電層上の第2の導電層と、前記第2の導電層上の第1の発光層と、前記第1の発光層上の共通電極と、を有し、
前記第2の発光デバイスは、第3の導電層と、前記第3の導電層上の第4の導電層と、前記第4の導電層上の第2の発光層と、前記第2の発光層上の前記共通電極と、を有し、
前記第2の導電層は、前記第1の導電層の側面を覆い、
前記第4の導電層は、前記第3の導電層の側面を覆い、
前記第1の発光層の端部は、前記第2の導電層の端部と揃っている、または概略揃っており、
前記第2の発光層の端部は、前記第4の導電層の端部と揃っている、または概略揃っている、表示装置。 - 請求項1において、
第1の絶縁層を有し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第1の発光層、前記第2の発光層、前記第2の導電層、及び、前記第4の導電層のそれぞれの側面を覆い、
前記共通電極は、前記第1の絶縁層上に位置する、表示装置。 - 請求項2において、
第2の絶縁層を有し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、無機材料を有し、
前記第2の絶縁層は、有機材料を有し、かつ、前記第1の絶縁層を介して、前記第1の発光層及び前記第2の発光層のそれぞれの側面と重なる、表示装置。 - 請求項2または3において、
第1の層を有し、
前記第1の層は、前記第1の発光層上に位置し、
断面視において、前記第1の層の一方の端部は、前記第1の発光層の端部及び前記第2の導電層の端部と揃っている、または概略揃っており、前記第1の層の他方の端部は、前記第1の発光層上に位置し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第1の層の上面を覆う、表示装置。 - 請求項4において、
前記第1の層は、無機絶縁層と、前記無機絶縁層上の導電層と、の積層構造を有する、表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至5のいずれか一において、
前記第1の発光デバイスは、前記第1の発光層と前記共通電極との間に、共通層を有し、
前記第2の発光デバイスは、前記第2の発光層と前記共通電極との間に、前記共通層を有し、
前記共通層は、正孔注入層、正孔輸送層、電子輸送層、及び電子注入層の少なくとも一つを有する、表示装置。 - 第1の発光デバイス及び第2の発光デバイスを有し、
前記第1の発光デバイスは、第1の導電層と、前記第1の導電層上の第2の導電層と、前記第2の導電層上の第1のEL層と、前記第1のEL層上の共通電極と、を有し、
前記第2の発光デバイスは、第3の導電層と、前記第3の導電層上の第4の導電層と、前記第4の導電層上の第2のEL層と、前記第2のEL層上の前記共通電極と、を有し、
前記第1のEL層は、前記第2の導電層上の第1の発光ユニットと、前記第1の発光ユニット上の第1の電荷発生層と、前記第1の電荷発生層上の第2の発光ユニットと、を有し、
前記第2のEL層は、前記第4の導電層上の第3の発光ユニットと、前記第3の発光ユニット上の第2の電荷発生層と、前記第2の電荷発生層上の第4の発光ユニットと、を有し、
前記第2の導電層は、前記第1の導電層の側面を覆い、
前記第4の導電層は、前記第3の導電層の側面を覆い、
前記第1のEL層の端部は、前記第2の導電層の端部と揃っている、または概略揃っており、
前記第2のEL層の端部は、前記第4の導電層の端部と揃っている、または概略揃っている、表示装置。 - 請求項7において、
第1の絶縁層を有し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第1のEL層、前記第2のEL層、前記第2の導電層、及び、前記第4の導電層のそれぞれの側面を覆い、
前記共通電極は、前記第1の絶縁層上に位置する、表示装置。 - 請求項8において、
第2の絶縁層を有し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、無機材料を有し、
前記第2の絶縁層は、有機材料を有し、かつ、前記第1の絶縁層を介して、前記第1のEL層及び前記第2のEL層のそれぞれの側面と重なる、表示装置。 - 請求項8または9において、
第1の層を有し、
前記第1の層は、前記第1のEL層上に位置し、
断面視において、前記第1の層の一方の端部は、前記第1のEL層の端部及び前記第2の導電層の端部と揃っている、または概略揃っており、前記第1の層の他方の端部は、前記第1のEL層上に位置し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第1の層の上面を覆う、表示装置。 - 請求項10において、
前記第1の層は、無機絶縁層と、前記無機絶縁層上の導電層と、の積層構造を有する、表示装置。 - 請求項7乃至11のいずれか一において、
前記第1の発光デバイスは、前記第1のEL層と前記共通電極との間に、共通層を有し、
前記第2の発光デバイスは、前記第2のEL層と前記共通電極との間に、前記共通層を有し、
前記共通層は、正孔注入層、正孔輸送層、電子輸送層、及び電子注入層の少なくとも一つを有する、表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至12のいずれか一に記載の表示装置と、
コネクタ及び集積回路のうち少なくとも一方と、を有する、表示モジュール。 - 請求項13に記載の表示モジュールと、
筐体、バッテリ、カメラ、スピーカ、及びマイクのうち少なくとも一つと、を有する、電子機器。 - 絶縁表面上に、第1の導電層及び第2の導電層をそれぞれ島状に形成し、
前記第1の導電層上及び前記第2の導電層上に、第1の導電膜を形成し、
前記第1の導電膜上に、第1の層を形成し、
前記第1の層上に、第1の犠牲層を形成し、
前記第1の層の端部及び前記第1の犠牲層の端部が前記第1の導電層の端部よりも外側に位置し、かつ、前記第1の導電膜の、前記第2の導電層と重なる領域の少なくとも一部が露出するように、前記第1の層及び前記第1の犠牲層を加工し、
前記第1の犠牲層上及び前記第1の導電膜上に、第2の層を形成し、
前記第2の層上に、第2の犠牲層を形成し、
前記第2の層の端部及び前記第2の犠牲層の端部が前記第2の導電層の端部よりも外側に位置し、かつ、前記第1の犠牲層の少なくとも一部が露出するように、前記第2の層及び前記第2の犠牲層を加工し、
前記第1の犠牲層及び前記第2の犠牲層をハードマスクに用いて、前記第1の導電膜を加工することで、前記第1の導電層と前記第1の層の間の第3の導電層と、前記第2の導電層と前記第2の層の間の第4の導電層と、を形成し、
前記第1の層及び前記第2の層の少なくとも一部が露出するように、前記第1の犠牲層及び前記第2の犠牲層の少なくとも一部を除去し、
前記第1の層上及び前記第2の層上に、共通電極を形成する、表示装置の作製方法。 - 請求項15において、
前記第3の導電層及び前記第4の導電層を形成した後、前記共通電極を形成する前に、
少なくとも前記第3の導電層の側面、前記第4の導電層の側面、前記第1の層の側面、前記第2の層の側面、前記第1の犠牲層の側面及び上面、並びに、前記第2の犠牲層の側面及び上面を覆う、第1の絶縁膜を形成し、
前記第1の絶縁膜を加工することで、断面視において、一方の端部が前記第1の層上に位置し、かつ、他方の端部が前記第2の層上に位置する、第1の絶縁層を形成する、表示装置の作製方法。 - 請求項16において、
無機材料を用いて、前記第1の絶縁膜を形成し、
前記第1の絶縁膜を形成した後、前記第1の絶縁膜上に、有機材料を用いて、第2の絶縁膜を形成し、
前記第2の絶縁膜を加工することで、断面視において、一方の端部が前記第1の層上に位置し、かつ、他方の端部が前記第2の層上に位置する、第2の絶縁層を形成する、表示装置の作製方法。 - 請求項17において、
前記有機材料として、感光性の樹脂を用いる、表示装置の作製方法。 - 請求項15乃至18のいずれか一において、
前記第1の犠牲層の少なくとも一部を除去する工程で、断面視において、一方の端部が前記第1の層の端部と揃う、または概略揃い、かつ、他方の端部が前記第1の層上に位置するように、前記第1の犠牲層を加工する、表示装置の作製方法。 - 請求項15乃至19のいずれか一において、
前記共通電極を形成する前に、前記第1の層上及び前記第2の層上に、共通層として、正孔注入層、正孔輸送層、電子輸送層、及び電子注入層の少なくとも一つを形成する、表示装置の作製方法。
Priority Applications (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202280019440.4A CN117044400A (zh) | 2021-03-12 | 2022-02-28 | 显示装置、显示模块、电子设备及显示装置的制造方法 |
JP2023504871A JPWO2022189882A1 (ja) | 2021-03-12 | 2022-02-28 | |
KR1020237034375A KR20230156376A (ko) | 2021-03-12 | 2022-02-28 | 표시 장치, 표시 모듈, 전자 기기, 및 표시 장치의 제작 방법 |
US18/280,287 US20240074224A1 (en) | 2021-03-12 | 2022-02-28 | Display apparatus, display module, electronic device, and method of manufacturing display apparatus |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2021-040050 | 2021-03-12 | ||
JP2021040050 | 2021-03-12 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022189882A1 true WO2022189882A1 (ja) | 2022-09-15 |
Family
ID=83227463
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/IB2022/051717 WO2022189882A1 (ja) | 2021-03-12 | 2022-02-28 | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20240074224A1 (ja) |
JP (1) | JPWO2022189882A1 (ja) |
KR (1) | KR20230156376A (ja) |
CN (1) | CN117044400A (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2022189882A1 (ja) |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2010218718A (ja) * | 2009-03-13 | 2010-09-30 | Seiko Epson Corp | 表示装置および電子機器 |
JP2012238580A (ja) * | 2011-04-28 | 2012-12-06 | Canon Inc | 有機el表示装置の製造方法 |
KR20150048508A (ko) * | 2013-10-28 | 2015-05-07 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 표시 장치, 표시 장치의 제조 방법, 및 유기 발광 표시 장치 |
US20170148860A1 (en) * | 2015-11-25 | 2017-05-25 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Organic light emitting display device |
US20180261798A1 (en) * | 2017-03-10 | 2018-09-13 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Organic light-emitting display apparatus and method of manufacturing the same |
US20200212336A1 (en) * | 2018-12-27 | 2020-07-02 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
Family Cites Families (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2018087625A1 (en) | 2016-11-10 | 2018-05-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method of display device |
-
2022
- 2022-02-28 CN CN202280019440.4A patent/CN117044400A/zh active Pending
- 2022-02-28 US US18/280,287 patent/US20240074224A1/en active Pending
- 2022-02-28 WO PCT/IB2022/051717 patent/WO2022189882A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2022-02-28 JP JP2023504871A patent/JPWO2022189882A1/ja active Pending
- 2022-02-28 KR KR1020237034375A patent/KR20230156376A/ko unknown
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2010218718A (ja) * | 2009-03-13 | 2010-09-30 | Seiko Epson Corp | 表示装置および電子機器 |
JP2012238580A (ja) * | 2011-04-28 | 2012-12-06 | Canon Inc | 有機el表示装置の製造方法 |
KR20150048508A (ko) * | 2013-10-28 | 2015-05-07 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 표시 장치, 표시 장치의 제조 방법, 및 유기 발광 표시 장치 |
US20170148860A1 (en) * | 2015-11-25 | 2017-05-25 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Organic light emitting display device |
US20180261798A1 (en) * | 2017-03-10 | 2018-09-13 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Organic light-emitting display apparatus and method of manufacturing the same |
US20200212336A1 (en) * | 2018-12-27 | 2020-07-02 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2022189882A1 (ja) | 2022-09-15 |
KR20230156376A (ko) | 2023-11-14 |
US20240074224A1 (en) | 2024-02-29 |
CN117044400A (zh) | 2023-11-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2022189882A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022189883A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022180482A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022180468A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022185150A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022189878A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022185149A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022200914A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022224080A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022263969A1 (ja) | 表示装置 | |
WO2023100022A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2023073491A1 (ja) | 有機化合物の酸素付加体を低減する方法、電子デバイスの作製方法および表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2023281344A1 (ja) | 表示装置 | |
WO2023281347A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、及び電子機器 | |
WO2023275654A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、及び電子機器 | |
WO2023285907A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2022238806A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2023021365A1 (ja) | 表示装置の作製方法、表示装置、表示モジュール、及び、電子機器 | |
WO2023002297A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2023285906A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2023275653A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び表示装置の作製方法 | |
WO2023119050A1 (ja) | 表示装置 | |
CN116918454A (zh) | 显示装置、显示模块、电子设备及显示装置的制造方法 | |
KR20240050346A (ko) | 표시 장치 및 전자 기기 | |
CN118284923A (zh) | 显示装置及显示装置的制造方法 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22766453 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2023504871 Country of ref document: JP |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 18280287 Country of ref document: US |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 202280019440.4 Country of ref document: CN |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20237034375 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 1020237034375 Country of ref document: KR |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 22766453 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |